Home

R&S FSV-K7/K7S Firmware Options Analog

1. GEES Der SENSe ADEMod FM OFFSet lt Type gt This command calculates the FM offset of the currently available measurement data set If averaging has been activated before acquiring the data set using SENSe J ADEMod FM TDOMain TYPE on page 125 the averaged FM offset over several measurements can also be obtained by setting lt result type gt AVERage The offset thus determined differs from the one calculated by the CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult lt t gt on page 86 command since for determination of the frequency deviation the modulation is removed by means of low pass filtering producing results that are different from those obtained by averaging Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 128 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 REESEN Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt Type gt lt result type gt IMMediate AVERage IMMediate The current measurement results will be used for calculating the FM offset AVERage The measurement results that were averaged over the given of measurements will be used for calculating the FM offset If no average measurement was active during the last measure ment sequence only the SENSe ADEMod FM OFFSet IMMediate command see SENSe ADEMod FM OFFSet on
2. C off Summary Diagrams AM Time Domain C AM Spectrum FM Time Domain FM Spectrum PM Time Domain PM Spectrum RF Time Domain RF Spectrum e Off Whether it is displayed or not e Summary Whether a summary of the evaluation lists from all screens is displayed instead of a diagram e AM FM PMI RF Diagrams Which type of diagram is displayed For details on the result diagram types see chapter 2 1 9 Measurement Result Display on page 20 Note By default the diagram or summary displays the data from trace 1 To change the trace use the Select Trace softkey Remote command DISP WIND2 STAT ON see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe on page 107 Displays second window Screen B CALC2 FEED XTIMe FM AFSPektruml1 see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Displays an AF spectrum diagram of the demodulated FM signal from trace 1 in screen B Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 27 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 El Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Predefined Display Config AM You can store and load predefined screen configurations All available configurations are displayed in the Predefined tab The current screen configuration is indicated under Current at the top of the list x Predefined A FM Time Domain RF Config A RF Time Domain B RF Spectrum PM Config A PM Spectrum B FM
3. Suffix n irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 100 to 100 RST 0 Default unit Example TRIG LEV AM REL 20 Sets the AM trigger threshold to 20 Mode ADEMOD TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower lt Level gt This command sets the level of the baseband power trigger source for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 158 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt Level gt Range 50 dBm to 20 dBm RST 20 DBM Example TRIG LEV BB 30DBM Mode All TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel FM lt Level gt The command sets the level when FM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering with AF AM AMRelative FM and PM trigger sources to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Suffix n irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 10 to 10 RST 0 Hz Default unit MHz Example TRIG LEV FM 10 kHz Sets the FM trigger threshold to 10 kHz Mode ADEMOD TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel IFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed
4. OUTPut IF SOURce lt Source gt This command selects the source of the IF output Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 175 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh 2 3 10 4 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt Source gt IF intermediate frequency output viDeo video output 200 mV RST IF Example OUTP IF VID Selects the video signal for the IF output connector MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe lt Trace gt lt FileName gt This command stores the selected trace in the specified window in a file with ASCII for mat The file format is described in chapter 2 1 10 ASCII File Export Format on page 23 The decimal separator decimal point or comma for floating point numerals contained in the file is defined with the FORMat DEXPort DSEParator command see FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 177 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant Parameters lt Trace gt 1to6 selected measurement trace lt FileName gt DOS file name The file name includes indication of the path and the drive name Indication of the path complies with DOS conventions Example MMEM STOR TRAC 3 TEST ASC Stores trace 3 in the file TEST ASC OUTPut subsystem OUTPut DIQ lt State gt If enabled the captured IQ data is output to the R amp S Digital UO Interface in
5. default number of sweep points in Spectrum mode 1 1 sample rate Example ADEM ZOOM STAT ON see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 139 Switches on the zoom function ADEM Z00M STAR 500us Sets the starting point of the display to 500 us Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth lt Length gt The command allows you to define the length of the zoom area for the analog demodu lated measurement data in the specified window manually If the length is defined man ually using this command the zoom mode is also set to manual Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt Length gt RST sweep time Length of the zoom area in seconds Example ADEM ZOOM LENG 2s Zoom mode is set to manual and the zoom length to 2 seconds Mode ADEMOD SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth MODE lt Mode gt The command defines whether the length of the zoom area for the analog demodulated measurement data is defined automatically or manually in the specified window By default and in automatic mode the number of sweep points is used as the zoom length If the zoom length was already entered using SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth on page 140 manual zoom mode is set automatically Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 140 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Paramet
6. File contents header and data section Description Meas Result Result type Meas Signal Magnitude Result display Demodulator Offset QPSK Demodulation type ResultMode Trace Result mode x unit sym Unit of the x axis y unit dBm Unit of the y axis Trace Mode Clear Write Trace mode Values 592 Number of results lt values gt List of results Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Apart from the power measurement menu MEAS key that is not available in the Analog Demodulation mode all other menus not described here are provided as described for the base unit For details refer to the corresponding menu descriptions Importing and Exporting UO Data UO data that was captured in the R amp S FSV K7 application can now be exported to a file on the R amp S FSV The stored data can then be imported again at a later time also by different applications for further processing As opposed to storing trace data which may be averaged or restricted to peak values I Q data is stored as it was captured without further processing The data is stored as complex values in 32 bit floating point format The UO data is stored in a packed format with the file extension iq tar The Import and Export functions are available from the Save Recall menu which is displayed when you press the SAVE RCL key on the front panel For details see Import ing and Exporting UO Data in the b
7. Mode ADEMOD Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 131 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 SENSe JADEMod PM AFSPectrum RESult lt Type gt This command reads out the AF spectrum result data of the PM demodulated signal for the specified result type The data format of the output data is determined with the FOR Mat command Return values lt Type gt lt result type gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold for details see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 The specified result type must be one of those configured with the SENSe ADEMod PM AFSPectrum TYPE on page 131 command Otherwise a query error will be generated Return values ASCII Format FORMat ASCII or Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 for details see chapter 2 3 6 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 115 Default unit dB logarithmic display or RAD or DEG linear dis play Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 132 R amp S FSV K7 K7S SSS QQ SSS SE ae Example Mode Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 see SENSe ADEMod SET on page 134 Sets demodulator ADEM PM AVER MAXH MINH see SENSe ADEMod PM TDOMain TYPE on page 129 Selects the PM results to be
8. R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S 3 2 5 Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt TDOmain TYPE lt TraceMode gt This command selects the trace modes of the FM stereo signal to be measured simul taneously in zero span For each trace a mode can be defined however only if the speci fied channel is currently displayed in one of the four screens If a trace mode is set for a channel that is not displayed a query error is generated Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt TraceMode gt lt TraceMode1 gt lt TraceMode2 gt lt TraceMode3 gt lt Trace Mode4 gt lt TraceMode5 gt lt TraceMode6 gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW OFF For details on trace modes see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 RST OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Example SFM LEFT TDOM TYPE WRIT OPE AVER Mode SFM TRIGger Subsystem FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S The TRIGger subsystem is used to synchronize instrument actions with events It is thus possible to control and synchronize the start of a sweep Commands of the TRIGger Subsystem TRiGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVelSFMALEPT eseu ERESEeEES ENNER ENEE NEEN eE 237 See e ER OR Te EE 238 TRlGoerznztGtOuencell EVel GEMMPN 238 TRiGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVeliSFM MONO 20 22 2c ce
9. Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis lt Value gt This command sets the limit that the hysteresis value for the IF power trigger has to fall below in order to trigger the next measurement Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 3 dB Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 157 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 REESEN Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example TRIG SOUR IFP Sets the IF power trigger source TRIG IFP HYST 10DB Sets the hysteresis limit value TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel AM ABSolute lt Level gt The command sets the level when RF power signals are used as trigger source For triggering with AF AM AMRelative FM and PM trigger sources to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Suffix n irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 100 to 30 RST 20 dBm Default unit dBm Example TRIG LEV AM 30 dBm Sets the RF power signal trigger threshold to 30 dBm Mode ADEMOD TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel AM RELative lt Level gt The command sets the level when AM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering with AF AM AMRelative FM and PM trigger sources to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal
10. 0 5 Span RF Spectrum CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the span Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 149 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 149 0 5 Demod BW AF RF Time Domain AF Spectrum CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 50 of the demodulation bandwidth Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 149 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 149 x Span RF Spectrum CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as of the span Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 149 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 149 x Demod BW AF RF Time Domain AF Spectrum CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to set the step size for the center frequency as of the demod ulation bandwidth Values between 1 and 100 in steps of 1 are allowed The default setting is 10 Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 149 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 149 Center CF Stepsize Sets the step size to the value of the center frequency and removes the coupling of the step size to span or resolution bandwidth Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 39 R amp S FSV K7 K7S
11. For details see the section Interface Status Information for the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Return values lt ConnState gt Defines whether a device is connected or not 0 No device is connected 1 A device is connected lt DeviceName gt Device ID of the connected device lt SerialNumber gt Serial number of the connected device lt PortName gt Port name used by the connected device lt SampleRate gt Maximum or currently used sampling rate of the connected device in Hz depends on the used connection protocol version indicated by lt SampleRateType gt parameter lt MaxTransferRate gt Maximum data transfer rate of the connected device in Hz lt ConnProtState gt State of the connection protocol which is used to identify the con nected device Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 171 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 lt PRBSTestState gt State of the PRBS test Not Started Has to be Started Started Passed Failed Done lt SampleRateType gt 0 Maximum sampling rate is displayed 1 Current sampling rate is displayed lt Placeholder gt for future use currently 0 Example INP DIQ CDEV Result 1 SMU200A 103634 Out A 70000000 100000000 Passed Not Started 0 0 Mode IQ VSA EVDO
12. Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S 20 Hz 100 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 1 6 MHz 50 Hz 200 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 300 Hz 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Note for FM stereo K7S all filters are active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command S S ENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs STATe on page 146 ENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency on page 147 Low Pass AF Filter Left Opens the Low Pass selection list to select the filter type Relative and absolute low pass filter are available e Absolute low pass filters The 3 kHz 15 kHz 23 kHz and 150 kHz softkeys switch on a absolute low pass filter The filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 3 kHz 15 kHz and 23 kHz filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filters 30 dB octave The 150 kHz filter is designed as 8th order Butterworth filter 48 dB octave The absolute low pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 3 kHz 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 15 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz 23 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 150 kHz 400 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Note for FM stereo K7S all filters are active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Relative low pass filters The filters
13. Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 223 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S EE Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Mode SFM CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion DFD SEARchsignal ONCE This command starts the search of the signals required for the difference frequency dis tortion measurement in the specified window Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Example CALC MARK FUNC DFD SEAR ONCE Usage Event Mode SFM CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion IMD STATe lt State gt This command activates intermodulation distortion measurement in the specified win dow Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC IMD ON Mode SFM CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion IMD UNIT lt ResultUnit gt This command defines the unit for the intermodulation distortion measurement results Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt ResultUnit gt PCT DB RST PCT Example CALC MARK FUNC IMD UNIT DB Mode SFM Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 224 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion IMD RESult lt m gt This command queries the result of the intermodulation distortion measurement in the specified window Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt m gt 1 6 irrelevant Return values lt Resul
14. Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 see SENSe ADEMod SET on page 134 Sets demodulator ADEM SPEC AVER MAXH MINH Selects RF spectrum results to be measured ADEM SPEC WRIT OFF OFF Selects the AM results to be measured A S DEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 witches the demodulator on INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for termination FORM ASC see FORMat DATA on page 177 Selects output format ADEM SPEC RES AVER Reads RF spectrum average results ADEM SPEC RES MAXH Reads RF spectrum max hold results AD Re A EM SPEC RES MINH ads RF spectrum min hold results DEM SPEC RES WRIT Reads spectrum current results ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum lt FreqRange gt This command sets the maximum frequency range for displaying the RF spectrum that was determined from the FM demodulation data The maximum span corresponds to the measurement bandwidth of analog demodulation for details refer to SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation on page 125 For details refer on the relation of bandwidth and sample rate refer to Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset Parameters lt FreqRange gt Example Mode Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 RST 5 MHz ADEM ON s
15. refer to data sheet RST 61 2 kHz ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on the analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM SPEC see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on the RF spectrum result display or CALC FEED XTIM FM AFSP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on the AF spectrum result display of FM signal ADEM SPEC BAND 61 2kHz Sets the resolution bandwidth to 61 2 kHz ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum RESult lt Type gt This command reads out the RF spectrum result data for the specified result type The data format of the output data block is defined by the FORMat command Return values lt Type gt Return values Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 lt result type gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold for details see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 The result type indicated must be one of those configured by SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum TYPE on page 135 Otherwise a query error will be generated ASCII Format FORMat ASCII or Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 for details see chapter 2 3 6 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 115 The output units are described in CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 101 136 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Example Mode
16. 06 1 4 irrelevant 1 6 irrelevant ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM RFP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on RF power result display CALC MARK FUNC ADEM CARR Queries the carrier power Query only ADEMOD 85 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult lt t gt This command queries the frequency error with FM and PM demodulation The frequency error is determined from the current measurement data CLR WRITE trace The offset thus determined differs from that calculated in the SENSe ADEMod FM OFFSet on page 128 command since for determination of the frequency deviation the modulation is removed by means of low pass filtering producing results that are different from those obtained by averaging with the SENSe command Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt t gt 1 6 irrelevant Example ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM TDOM see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on FM result display CALC MARK FUNC ADEM FERR Queries the frequency error of trace 1 Usage Query only Mode ADEMOD CALCulate lt n gt MARKer
17. 1 6 trace 1 2 3 4 Borg Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 88 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM AFSP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on AF spectrum of FM DISP TRAC ON see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 109 Switches on the trace CALC MARK FUNC ADEM THD RES Queries THD result Usage Query only Mode ADEMOD 2 3 2 2 Other CALCulate commands CALCulate lt n gt FEED lt Evaluation gt This command selects the evaluation method of the measured data that is to be displayed in the specified window The suffix lt 1 6 gt indicates which of the traces is evaluated in the result summary Note that all result summaries are identical as the results of all evaluations are included in the summary Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt Evaluation gt XTIM AM RELative TDOMain XTIM AM RELative AFSPectrum lt 1 6 gt XTIM AM ABSolute TDOMain XTIM RFPower TDOMain XTIM FM TDOMain XTIM FM AFSPectrum lt 1 6 gt XTIM PM TDOMain XTIM PM AFSPectrum lt 1 6 gt XTIM AMSummary lt 1 6 gt ABSolute XTIM AMSummary lt 1 6 gt RELative XTIM
18. 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us RST 50 us Example SFM LEFT FILT DEMP TCON 75us Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer HPASs STATe lt State gt This command activates deactivates the selected high pass filter for the specified channel type For details on the high pass filter refer to High Pass on page 29 Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SFM LEFT FILT HPAS STAT ON Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer HPASs FREQuency lt FilterType gt This command selects the high pass filter type for the specified channel type For details on filters refer to Deemphasis on page 31 Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt FilterType gt Range 50 to 300 RST 300Hz Default unit Hz Example SFM LEFT FILT HPAS FREQ 300Hz Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs STATe lt State gt This command activates the low pass filter for the specified channel type For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 29 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 232 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S REESEN Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX
19. 5 MHz 12 MHz 83 33 ns 133 3 ms 80 ms 10 48575995 s 3 MHz 10 666 MHz 93 75 ns 150 ms 133 3 ms 17 47626667 s 1 6 MHz 6 4 MHz 156 25 ns 250 ms 250 ms 32 76799984 s 800 kHz 3 2 MHz 312 5 ns 5 ms 5 ms 65 53599969 s 1 gaussian filter curve is limited by IQ bandwidth ee Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 19 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh 2 1 9 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Demod band Sample rate Measurement time Trigger offset width Min Max Min Max 400 kHz 1 6 MHz 625 ns 1s 1s 131 0719994 s 200 kHz 800 kHz 1 25 us 2s 2s 262 1439988 s 100 kHz 400 kHz 2 5 us 4s 4s 524 2879975 s 50 kHz 200 kHz 5 us 8s 8 s 1048 575995 s 25 kHz 100 kHz 10 us 16s 16 s 2097 15199 s 12 5 kHz 50 kHz 20 us 32s 32 s 4194 30398 s 6 4 kHz 25 6 kHz 39 0625 us 62 5 s 62 5 s 8191 999961 s 3 2 kHz 12 8 kHz 78 125 us 125s 125 s 16383 99992 s 1 6 kHz 6 4 kHz 156 25 us 250 s 250 s 32767 99984 s 800 Hz 3 2 kHz 312 5 us 500 s 500 s 65535 99969 s 400 Hz 1 6 kHz 625 us 1000 s 1000 s 131071 9994 s 200 Hz 800 Hz 1 25 ms 2000 s 2000 s 262143 9988 s 100 Hz 400 Hz 2 5 ms 4000 s 4000 s 524287 9975 s 1 gaussian filter curve is limited by IQ bandwidth Large numbers of samples Principally the R amp S FSV can handle up to 1 6 million samples However when 480 001 samples are exceeded all traces that are not curren
20. AF Range lt Left Opens a submenu to define the modulation unit Phase Unit Rad Deg Unit AF Range lt Left Sets the phase unit to rad or deg for displaying PM signals Remote command UNIT THD on page 163 THD Unit DB Unit AF Range lt Left Sets the unit to percent or DB for THD measurements Remote command UNIT THD on page 163 Abs Dev Unit kHz dBm Unit AF Range lt Left Sets the unit for absolute deviation to kHz or dBm This softkey is only available with the FM Stereo option K7S Remote command UNIT ADEV on page 242 Rel Dev Unit dB Unit AF Range lt Left Sets the unit for relative deviation to dB or percent This softkey is only available with the FM Stereo option K7S Remote command UNIT RDEV on page 243 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 195 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Time Domain Zoom lt Left Opens a submenu to activate and configure the zoom function State On Off Time Domain Zoom lt Left Activates or deactivates the time domain zoom according to the defined settings ON Activates the time domain zoom The zoom area is defined using the Start Start on page 34 and Length Manual Length Manual on page 34 Length Auto Length Auto on page 35 softkeys OFF If more measured values than measurement points are available sev eral measured values are
21. Block Diagrams The software demodulator runs on the main processor of the analyzer The demodulation process is shown in figure 2 1 the figure below All calculations are performed simulta neously with the same UO data set Magnitude amplitude and phase of the complex UO pairs are determined The frequency result is obtained from the differential phase For details on the analyzer signal processing refer to the TRACe IQ subsystem in the base unit Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 11 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Software demodulator RF spectrum Trace Arithmetic trace Trace AF spectrum Arithmetic trace aaa frequency modulation COC AF trigger frequency _ lowpass carrier AM demodulator S power amplitude Trace RF power polation g 5 2 H Je Ee Trace metic Detector trace 2 modulation data frequency Q data Trace Inter Trace AM trace peak peak 1 2 pk pk rms modulation Counter depth modulation frequency carrier apas frequency FM demodulator x offset Coupling Trace Inter Trace pete gt FM vaco peak FM peak Detectors 12 pk pk amp ms Counter modulation frequency PM demodulator Sitti arctan Q 1 phase Inter Trace PM trace peak 1 pk pk ms Je Counter modulation frequency Fig 2 1 Block diagram of software demodulator R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV
22. CAL Culate lt n gt MARKERSM gt EE 105 CALCulatecnz MAbker mztSTATel 102 CALCu latesn gt THRESNOld DE 95 CALCulate cnz HbesboldGTATe 95 CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer DIAGnosticsn gt SERVICE NS OUNCE rosna ER EAEEESEREA EE dandis Ed dE gedoe deEdeeg endalaelentandienescs 177 DISPl y M TABE EE 106 DISPlay WSE LEC EE 112 DISPlayEWINDOWSN SSELSCU EE 107 DISPlayEWINDow lt n gt STAT Cs eeh EENS DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACecGMODE HCOhN nuous nnt 110 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACING 0 ccccccesceeeeeeeseeceeeeseceeeeeeaeecseeeeaeeseaeeeaeesaeenseeseaeeeeeeeeesaees 112 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACectGvTGCAL el 109 DlSblavf WiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALetMODE neen 109 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACectGvTGCALeiRlEVel 110 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFF Set 111 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACectGvITGCALetRbOGmon nnne 111 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACes lt t gt Y SCALe RVALUGC 2 ecccccecccceeeeecneeeeeeeecaeecaeeeeeeeesaeeeneeeeecseeseeeseaeees 111 DiSblavfWiNDow nz TRACecGlGTATel eneki es eenrtietrraeskrnntstnnastrnnsttnnnnttnnnsnnnnsnnnnseenn nne 109 DlSblavf WiNDow nzlSUlBVWimndow 21DzlGtElect 107 FORMat DEXPort DSEPatalor c 5 sec teadiinl Gatien Sot hte Ae Ahad ace ond nil Acie 177 FORMat DATA llNE Ee lr EE 178 INITlate nz CONTinuous 178 INN E RI A TE EE 179 INPUGAT F ttetl fe uge getgee eeeK eeh SEE
23. Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as dia ments log boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quota tion marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks Conventions for Procedure Descriptions When describing how to operate the instrument several alternative methods may be available to perform the same task In this case the procedure using the touchscreen is described Any elements that can be activated by touching can also be clicked using an additionally connected mouse The alternative procedure using the keys on the instru ment or the on screen keyboard is only described if it deviates from the standard oper ating procedures The term select may refer to any of the described methods i e using a finger on the touchscreen a mouse pointer in the display or a key on the instrument or on a keyboard Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 7 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Preface EH How to Use the Help System 1 3 How to Use the Help System Calling context sensitive and genera
24. DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page 111 AF Coupling AC DC AF Range lt Left Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 194 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Note This function is not available with the AF spectrum display of the FM or PM signal e FM signal display If DC is selected the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line e PM signal display If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of Tr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPling on page 118 Deviation Lin Log AF Range lt Left Switches between logarithmic and linear display of the modulation depth or the phase deviation R amp S FSV K7 only or the frequency deviation Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 112 Unit
25. EMPhasis TCONstant on page 231 Coupled AF Filter Left All channels for which this option is enabled are configured identically i e the channel settings are coupled If you change the settings for one coupled channel the settings are changed for all other coupled channels as well The settings are taken from the first channel for which coupling is enabled Remote command S ENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary COUPling on page 234 All AF Filter Off AF Filter Left Disables all specified AF Filters Remote command S Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 ENSe FILTer lt n gt AOFF on page 144 193 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S AF Range lt Left Opens a submenu to define the diagram scaling for AF displays Dev per Division AF Range lt Left Opens an edit dialog box to set the modulation depth or the phase deviation R amp S FSV K7 only or frequency deviation per division AM display 0 0001 to 1000 FM display 1 Hz div to 100 MHz div PM display 0 0001 rad div to 1000 rad div The softkey is not available if logarithmic display is set Deviation Lin Log softkey Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous on page 110 Reference Position AF Range lt Left Determines the position of the reference line for the modulation depth
26. Linear Yori cccscescececssscecevessces cecssscceceastcavsneecneqes Range Linear remote control Range Log remote control n s eenen Range Log 100 dB Range Log 10 dB ai e Range Logit OB EE Range Log 50 dB sisipain Range Log 5 dB 3 Range Log Manual ssassn nresesrinrsserrnnrsernnee Reference Fixed On Off ieeeeeneeereerrreene Reference Position K7 e Reference Position remote control 0000 Reference Value KO 33 194 199 Reference Value remote control analog demodulation EE 111 RetIFIXGG E 213 Ref Level Offset 203 Ref Level Offset remote control s eseese Ref Level Position ccccccecceecccsstseestvecscteenecsesssetsnisoeeeesees Ref Level Position remote control Ref Point Frequency ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Ref Point Frequency remote control Ref Point Level Ref Point Level remote control c ceeeeeeeees Ref Point Time remote control c ceeeeeeeee Ref Value Position remote control Res BW analog demodulation 01eeeeeeee Res BW remote control Ki RF Power K7 Rightiimit c sea A ailiveich aad ancien abate Right Limit remote control aeeee Save Evaluation List remote control i Search Limits remote control s s ernennen Search Lim Off remote control eeee Select 1 2 3 4 remote control Select Marker NO cccccceseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees R amp S FSV K7 K
27. MHz Example TRIG LEV SFM MPX 2Hz Sets the trigger threshold of the MPX stereo signal to 2 Hz Mode SFM TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM MONO lt Level gt The command sets the level when the mono channel of a FM stereo signal is used as trigger source Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 10 to 10 RST 0 Hz Default unit MHz Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 238 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S a M M Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Example TRIG LEV SFM MONO 2Hz Sets the trigger threshold of the mono stereo signal to 2 Hz Mode SFM TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM STEReo lt Level gt The command sets the level when the stereo channel is used as trigger source Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 10 to 10 RST 0 Hz Default unit MHz Example TRIG LEV SFM STER 2Hz Sets the trigger threshold of the stereo signal to 2 Hz Mode SFM TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM RDS lt Level gt The command sets the level when the RDS stereo channel is used as trigger source Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 10 to 10 RST 0 Hz Default unit MHz Example TRIG LEV SFM RDS 2Hz Sets the trigger threshold of the RDS stereo signal to 2 Hz Mode SFM TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM PILot lt Level gt The command sets
28. MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SFM LEFT FILT LPAS STAT ON Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs FREQuency lt Level gt This command activates deactivates the selected low pass filter for the specified channel type For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 29 Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt RST RST value Example SFM LEFT FILT LPAS FREQ 10 Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs FREQuency ABSolute lt FilterType gt This command selects the absolute low pass filter type in the specified window For details on filters refer to Low Pass on page 29 For details about the demodulation bandwidth range refer to Demod BW on page 29 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt FilterType gt 3kHz 15kHz 150kHz RST 15kHz Example SFM LEFT FILT LPAS FREQ 150kHz Selects the low pass filter for the demodulation bandwidth range from 400 kHz to 16 MHz Mode SFM Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 233 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FiILTer LPASs FREQuency RELative lt FilterT ype gt
29. OFF Example SFM LEFT FILT CCIR WEIG ON Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer COUPling lt State gt This command couples the filter settings for the specified channel type to other channels The filter settings for all channels for which this setting is set to ON are defined identi cally Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SFM LEFT FILT COUP ON Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FiILTer DEMPhasis STATe lt State gt This command activates deactivates the selected deemphasis for the specified channel type Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SFM LEFT FILT DEMP STAT ON Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer DEMPhasis TCONstant lt Value gt This command selects the deemphasis for the specified channel type For details on deemphasis refer to Deemphasis on page 31 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 231 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt Value gt
30. Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 76 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 a a ee eS Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Level Unit Signal Source Defines the unit used for the full scale level Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT on page 173 Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level Signal Source If enabled the reference level is adjusted to the full scale level automatically if any change occurs Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe COUPling on page 172 EXIQ Opens a configuration dialog box for an optionally connected R amp S EX IQ BOX and a submenu to access the main settings quickly Note The EX IQ Box functionality is not supported for R amp S FSV models 1321 3008Kxx If the optional R amp S DiglConf software is installed the submenu consists only of one key to access the software Note that R amp S DiglConf requires a USB connection not LAN from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S EX IQ BOX in addition to the R amp S Digital UO Interface connection R amp S DiglConf version 2 10 or higher is required For typical applications of the R amp S EX IQ BOX see also the description of the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 in the base unit manual For details on configuration see the R amp S Ex UO Box External Signal Interface Module Manual For details on installation and operation of the R amp S DiglConf software see the R amp S EX IQ BOX Digital
31. SENSeJADEMod SQUeICHILEVE oi 2722 rn AEE AREATA 138 ISENSCHADEMOG NR 139 IGENSelADEModens ZOOMESTATel 139 SENSe ADEMod lt n ZOOMIS TAR sesice cecceteeceeat laceekuanees cleat ees See NEEN SEENEN veces 139 SENSe ADEMed n gt ZOOM ENGIN DEE 140 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth MODE ccceece cece eee eee eee e eae eect eae eases canes esaeeeae 140 SENSe ADEMod STATe lt State gt This command activates the analog demodulator of the instrument The instrument will be set to zero span at the current center frequency Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example ADEM ON Switches the analog demodulator on Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AF CENTer lt Frequency gt This command sets the center frequency for AF spectrum result display Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt Frequency gt RST 1 25 MHz Example ADEM ON see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on the analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM AFSP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on AF spectrum result display of FM ADEM BAND 5 MHz see SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation on page 125 Sets the measurement bandwidth ADEM AF CENT 500kHz see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF CENTer on page 117 Sets the AF center frequency A S DEM AF SPAN 200kHz see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF PAN on page 118 Sets the AF sp
32. SEQuence SOURce on page 161 SWE EGAT SOUR RFP for gated triggering see SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 151 IF Power lt Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the measurement channel For this purpose the R amp S FSV uses a level detector at the second intermediate fre quency The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency is 20 MHz The R amp S FSV is triggered as soon as the trigger level is exceeded within a 10 MHz range around the selected fre quency start frequency in the frequency sweep Thus the measurement of spurious emissions e g for pulsed carriers is possible even if the carrier lies outside the selected frequency span Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 SWE EGAT SOUR IFP for gated triggering see SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 151 Left Trigger Source Triggers on the specified frequency level of the left FM signal Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM LEFT on page 237 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 209 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S REESEN Instrume
33. TYPE lt Type gt This command selects the result types to be created in parallel by the RF spectrum mea surement with active analog demodulation Parameters lt Type gt Example Mode RST OFF OFF OFF lt result type 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW OFF for details see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 ADEM SPEC AVER MAXH MINH Creates average max hold and min hold values at a time ADEM SPEC WRIT OFF OFF Only creates the current measurement values ADEM SPEC OFF OFF OFE Switches analog demodulator off ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution lt Bandwidth gt This command sets the resolution bandwidth for the spectrum representation that was determined from the analog demodulation data Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 135 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The recording time required is calculated from the sampling rate indirectly set via SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 137 or SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation on page 125 If the available record ing time is not sufficient for the given bandwidth the recording time is set to its maximum and the resolution bandwidth is enlarged to the resulting bandwidth Parameters lt Bandwidth gt Example Mode
34. TYPE on page 143 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu SWEEP Key R amp S FSV K7 The following table shows all softkeys available in the Sweep menu in Analog Demod ulation mode SWEEP key It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or mea surement mode this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description COMMMUOUS SWS Di EE 54 SINIO SWS EE 54 Continue SWIGIS SWOOD E 54 ONE 55 SWEEP OUM ET 55 SWP BT 55 Continuous Sweep Sets the continuous sweep mode the sweep takes place continuously according to the trigger settings This is the default setting The trace averaging is determined by the sweep count value see the Sweep Count softkey Sweep Count on page 55 Remote command INIT CONT ON see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 178 Single Sweep Sets the single sweep mode after triggering starts the number of sweeps that are defined by using the Sweep Count softkey The measurement stops after the defined number of sweeps has been performed Remote command INIT CONT OFF see INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous on page 178 Continue Single Sweep Repeats the number of sweeps set by using the Sweep Count softkey without deleting the trace of the last measurement This is particularly of interest when using the trace configurations Average or Max Hold to take previously recorded measurements into
35. This command selects the relative low pass filter type in the specified window For details on filters refer to Low Pass softkey For details about the demodulation bandwidth range refer to Demod BW on page 29 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt FilterType gt 5PCT 10PCT 25PCT RST 25PCT Example SFM LEFT FILT LPAS FREQ 25PCT Selects the low pass filter as 25 of the demodulation bandwidth Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary COUPling lt State gt This command couples the channel settings to other channels i e channels for which this command is set to ON are configured identically Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SFM LEFT RSUM COUP ON Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary DETector FUNCtion lt Detector gt This command defines the detector used to determine the deviation value of the left channel of the FM stereo signal in the result summary Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 234 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S REESEN Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Parameters lt Detector gt RMS SRMS PPEak NPEak PAVerage QPEak SQ
36. amp Co KG Service Manual This manual is available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument It describes how to check compliance with rated specifications instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the R amp S FSV by replacing modules The manual includes the following chapters Chapter 1 Performance Test Chapter 2 Adjustment Chapter 3 Repair Chapter 4 Software Update Installing Options Chapter 5 Documents Online Help The online help contains context specific help on operating the R amp S FSV and all available options It describes both manual and remote operation The online help is installed on Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 6 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Preface DESSERT 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation the R amp S FSV by default and is also available as an executable chm file on the CD delivered with the instrument Release Notes The release notes describe the installation of the firmware new and modified functions eliminated problems and last minute changes to the documentation The corresponding firmware version is indicated on the title page of the release notes The current release notes are provided in the Internet Conventions Used in the Documentation Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation
37. lt 0 sweep starts earlier pre trigger only possible for span 0 and gated trigger switched off not possible if RMS or average detector activated maximum allowed range and the maximum resolution limited by the sweep time rangemax 499 500 x sweep time e resolutioNmax sweep time 500 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 64 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Dee 2 2 10 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 In the trigger modeTime this softkey is not available For details on the relation between demodulation bandwidth and trigger offset refer to chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 157 Repetition Interval Opens an edit dialog box to define a repetition interval in which the measurement is triggered The shortest interval is 2 ms This softkey is only available if the trigger source Time is selected see Time on page 64 Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence TIME RINTerval on page 160 Trigger Hysteresis Defines the value for the trigger hysteresis for IF power or RF Power trigger sources The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote comma
38. lt trigger source gt Selection of the trigger source to use for the demodulator IMMediate EXTernal IFPower RFPower AF AM AMRe lative FM PM Note After selecting IF Power the trigger threshold can be set with the TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel IFPower com mand RST IMMediate lt trigger slope gt POSitive NEGative Used slope of the trigger signal The value indicated here will be ignored for lt trigger source gt IMMediate RST POSitive Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 134 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 lt offset samples gt lt of meas gt Example Mode Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Number of samples to be used as an offset to the trigger signal For details refer to chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 The value indicated here is ignored for lt trigger source gt IMMe diate RST 0 Number of repetitions of the measurement to be executed The value indicated here is especially necessary for the average max hold minhold function Range 0 to 32767 RST 0 ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 Performs a measurement at sample rate 8 MHz record length 32000 trigger source EXTernal trigger slope POSitive offset samples 500 500 samples before trigger occurred of meas 30 ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum
39. the gate remains open until the gate delay SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDof f has expired RST EDGE Example SWE EGAT TYPE EDGE Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 151 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 DEET 2 3 6 9 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 SENSe SWEep POINts lt NumberPoints gt This command defines the number of measurement points to be collected during one sweep Parameters lt NumberPoints gt Range 101 to 32001 RST 691 Example SWE POIN 251 SENSe SWEep TIME lt Time gt This command defines the sweep time Parameters lt Time gt Refer to Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset Other commands in the SENSe subsystem SENSe JAVERage lt n gt COUNt lt NoMeasurements gt This command defines the number of measurements which contribute to the average value Note that continuous averaging is performed after the indicated number has been reached in continuous sweep mode In single sweep mode the sweep is stopped as soon as the indicated number of meas urements Sweeps is reached Synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode This command has the same effect as the SENSe lt source gt SWEep COUNt com mand In both cases the number of measurements is defined wheth
40. 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the sam ple detector is used see chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 56 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 108 View Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 108 Blank Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5
41. 72 L Peak Sei E 73 Glesener ie 73 eet hed avast ceiestebtstar eacephelied anebaaant vas eieiei 73 ent TT ME 73 L ASCII File ExQpOPtcciicisciccscsssedestensanssdsssisceessessedsensessaasstanneasenessasdetecsnauanianaiins 73 E DECIMO EE 74 e E E 74 Select Marker No Opens a submenu to select one of 16 markers and define whether the marker is a normal or a delta marker see Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 66 No indicates the number of the currently active marker See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 66 Phase Noise For AF spectrum displays the Phase Noise marker is a normal marker with a special display value Remote command CA CA LCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 92 LCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 92 Ref Fixed Opens a submenu to set all values of a reference point Instead of using the current values of the reference marker marker 1 as reference point for the delta markers level and frequency or time are set to fixed values and used as reference point Ref Fixed On Off Ref Fixed Switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off The level and frequency or time values of marker 1 immediately become the reference point but can be altered using the corresponding softkeys Ref Point Level on page 71 Ref Point Frequency span gt 0 R
42. ADEM FM RES MAXH Reads FM max hold results AD Re A EM FM RES MINH ads FM min hold results DEM AM REL RES WRIT Reads current AM result data Usage Query only Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod AM RELative AFSPectrum TYPE lt TraceMode gt This command selects the AF spectrum result types of the AM demodulated signal to be measured simultaneously Note in FM stereo mode option K7S only those traces can be measured that are cur rently displayed in at least one screen Parameters lt TraceMode gt lt TraceMode1 gt lt TraceMode2 gt lt TraceMode3 gt lt Trace Mode4 gt lt TraceMode5 gt lt TraceMode6 gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW OFF For details on trace modes see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 RST WRITe OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FM Stereo OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Example ADEM AM REL AFSP AVER MAXH MINH Determines average maximum and minimum value simultane ously ADEM AM REL AFSP WRIT OFF OFF Determines only current measurement results ADEM AM REL AFSP OFF OFF OFF Switches off calculation of the AF spectrum Mode ADEMOD Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 123 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 SENSe JADEMod AM RELative AFSPectrum RESult lt TraceMode gt This comm
43. AM ABSolute on page 158 Time Trigger Source Opens an edit dialog box to define a repetition interval in which the measurement is triggered The shortest interval is 2 ms Remote command TRIG SOUR TIMETRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level as a numeric value Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 210 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S a a a l Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S In the trigger mode Time this softkey is not available Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 159 For digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 158 Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default setting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restar ted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a 0 to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 161 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 150 Trigger Offset
44. DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion AUTO on page 153 Auto Peak Detector Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the Auto Peak detector For details see chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Remote command DET APE see SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion on page 153 Positive Peak Detector Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the Positive Peak detector For details see chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Remote command DET POS see SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion on page 153 Negative Peak Detector Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the Negative Peak detector For details see chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Remote command DET NEG see SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion on page 153 Sample Detector Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the Sample detector For details see chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Remote command DET SAMP see SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion on page 153 RMS lt Detector Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the RMS detector Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 58 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 El Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation opt
45. Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT3 X REL Outputs the frequency of delta marker 3 relative to marker 1 or relative to the reference position CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a delta marker The corresponding delta marker is activated if necessary The output is always a relative value referred to marker 1 or to the reference position reference fixed active To obtain a correct query result a complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between the activation of the delta marker and the query of the y value This is only possible in single sweep mode Depending on the unit defined with CALC UNIT POW or on the activated measuring functions the query result is output in the units below Table 2 6 Analog demodulation measurements Parameter measuring function or result display Output unit AM result display R amp S FSV K7 lin dB log FM result display R amp S FSV K7 Hz lin dB log PM result display R amp S FSV K7 rad deg lin dB log RF result display R amp S FSV K7 dB Range Log or Range Linear Range Linear Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a
46. Interface Module R amp S DigIConf Software Operating Manual TX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital output to a connected device Transmitter Type RX Settings EXIQ Opens the EX IQ BOX Settings dialog box to configure the R amp S FSV for digital input from a connected device Receiver Type Send To EXIQ The configuration settings defined in the dialog box are transferred to the R amp S EX IQ BOX Firmware Update EXIQ If a firmware update for the R amp S EX IQ BOxX is delivered with the R amp S FSV firmware this function is available In this case when you select the softkey the firmware update is performed R amp S Support EXIQ Stores useful information for troubleshooting in case of errors This data is stored in the C R_S Instr user Support directory on the instrument Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 77 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Dee Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 If you contact the Rohde amp Schwarz support to get help for a certain problem send these files to the support in order to identify and solve the problem faster DiglConf EXIQ Starts the optional R amp S DiglConf application This softkey is only available if the optional software is installed To return to the R amp S FSV application press any key on the front panel The application is displayed with
47. JADEMOG M TIME cnpc siencssceesnencetcesicensereees casneieeteqaitscaniceesneneencoadenatianvensuendenesmieivandieed a Ra sadi IEN Ge IADE Mod PM AF Gbechum RESOR 132 IGENZGe IADEMod DM AFGbechumt TvPEI 131 SENSe JADEMod PM RPOINMUE X viiesa cece cdscessieespodecesaevessedacnncd saavigdestes deeg deed deed 133 IGENZGe IADEMod PMI TDOMainl RE Gu 130 IEN Ge IADE Mod PM TDOMainlfTvpEl riisiviinaa riirii nasia daiiia vda a nadi arina ti 129 SENSE JADEMod RLENOIN Z seeen caont raai dovencea dinate ances dee DENETAN EA EENE a SEa RENAA Aa ESEE ane 134 SENSe JADEMod SET SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RE Gohuton 135 IGENZGe IADEMod GbECimum RE Gu 136 IEN Ge IADE Mod GbECirum SPAN ZOOM nt 138 SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum SPAN MAXiMUM 0 c ec cece cece e cence eeee tenes eeeaeeseaeeseaeeesaeesaeessaeesseeteeeseaees 137 SENSe JADEMod SPEGCtrum iTY PE secs gedroe ENEE castes eeh A gedet 135 SENS JADEMOd S QUICK LEV 6loc acncescencssceessatssnesndpnisieescencetisns end sisienconssticchiendetivass adsancsatendsbessvensetsasteroseeite 138 SENSe JADEMod SQUeICh STAT cece ees ceneeceeeeeeeceaeeesaeceeeeesseeeeeeeceeseaeeseaeessaeessaeeseaeeeseeseaeeneaes 138 SENSe JADEMOd SRAT 6 sicsisccusivascossstecs caries cesta aana aa E aED nitnde stn DE tutta e EE 139 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF CENTer SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AF COUPIING cceucsscnssnecnssnsencensescnsseassaenenonsouneesennconesnsendentaneanenstecientee
48. K7 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The AM DC FM DC and PM DC raw data of the demodulators is fed into the Trace Arithmetic block that combines consecutive data sets Possible trace modes are Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold and Average for details refer to chapter 2 1 4 Trace Mode Overview on page 15 The output data of the Trace Arithmetic block can be read via remote control The collected measured values are evaluated by the selected detector for details refer to chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 The result is displayed on the screen and can be read out via remote control In addition important parameters are calculated e A counter determines the modulation frequency for AM FM and PM e average power carrier power RF power e average frequency carrier frequency offset FM e The modulation depth or the frequency or phase deviation is displayed e AC coupling is possible with FM and PM display The deviations are determined from the trace data Peak Peak LG Peak Peak and RMS are displayed 2 1 2 Demodulation Bandwidth The demodulation bandwidth is not the 3 dB bandwidth but the useful bandwidth which is distortion free with regard to phase and amplitude Therefore the following formulas apply e AM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x modulation frequency e FM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x frequency deviation modulation frequency e PM demodulation bandwidth 2 2 x modulation
49. K7 7 FM Stereo option R amp S FSV K7S Mode ADEMOD SFM PROBe subsystem With firmware R amp S FSV 1 61SP2 or newer active probes are supported via an adapter The following commands activate and configure a connected probe which is to provide an input signal They are only available if a probe is connected to the instrument s RF INPUT and USB connectors For details see the base unit description PROBe ID PARTnumber This command returns the material part number of the connected probe Example PROB ID PART Usage Query only PROBe ID SRNumber This command returns the serial number of the connected probe Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 113 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 3 6 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example PROB ID SRN Usage Query only PROBe SETup MODE lt Mode gt This command defines which action is taken when the probe s micro button is pressed Parameters lt Mode gt RSINgle A single sweep is performed NOACtion No action is taken RST OFF Example PROB SET STAT ON PROBe SETup NAME This command returns the name of the connected probe Example PROB SET NAME Usage Query only PROBe SETup STATe This command queries whether a probe is connected to the instrument s RF INPUT and USB connectors and was recognized by the R amp S FSV Example PROB SET STAT ON Usage Query on
50. K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt m gt 1 16 marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK2 FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise marker 2 Mode ADEMOD CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ZOOM lt Range gt This command defines the range to be zoomed around marker 1 Marker 1 is activated first if necessary The subsequent frequency sweep is stopped at the marker position and the frequency of the signal is counted This frequency becomes the new center frequency and the zoomed span is set Note that you should perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Range gt lt numeric_value gt Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC ZOOM 1kHz WAI Activates zooming and waits for its end CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK lt DisplayT ype gt Links the markers in all displays of the specified type Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt m gt 1 16 marker Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 94 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt DisplayTyp
51. K7 K7S Preface Documentation Overview In the individual option manuals the specific instrument functions of the option are described in detail For additional information on default settings and parameters refer to the data sheets Basic information on operating the R amp S FSV is not included in the option manuals The following Operating Manuals are available for the R amp S FSV e R amp S FSV base unit in addition R amp S FSV K9 Power Sensor Support R amp S FSV K14 Spectrogram Measurement e R amp S FSV K7 Analog Demodulation and R amp S FSV K7S FM Stereo Measurements e R amp S FSV K10 GSM EDGE Measurement e R amp S FSV K30 Noise Figure Measurement e R amp S FSV K40 Phase Noise Measurement e R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Operating Manual R amp S FSV K70 Vector Signal Analysis Getting Started First measurements e R amp S FSV K72 3GPP FDD BTS Analysis e R amp S FSV K73 3GPP FDD UE Analysis e R amp S FSV K76 77 3GPP TD SCDMA BTS UE Measurement e R amp S FSV K82 83 CDMA2000 BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K84 85 1xEV DO BTS MS Analysis e R amp S FSV K91 WLAN IEEE 802 1 1a b g j n e R amp S FSV K93 WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM OFDMA Analysis e R amp S FSV K100 K104 EUTRA LTE Downlink Measurement Application e R amp S FSV K101 K105 EUTRA LTE Uplink Measurement Application These manuals are available in PDF format on the CD delivered with the instrument The printed manual can be ordered from Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH
52. L Time Domain ZOOM EE 36 D Ni E E 36 e BEE 36 L Zero Phase Reference Point 37 L Phase Wrap OniCn 37 RF EE 37 L Display Config EE 37 L Select e EE 37 EE 37 L Meas VE 37 ll EE 37 E EE 37 L Time Domain EE 38 Dee Ee 38 L Sguelh EE 38 Display e E 38 AM Selects AM as the modulation type changes the signal display and opens a submenu to set the measurement configuration In single sweep mode the data is determined from the current UO data set i e a change to a different type does not trigger a new measurement This menu is also displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key after changing the modulation type Remote command CALC FEED XTIM AM see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 26 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 El Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Display Config AM You configure the display settings for the results in the Display Configuration dialog box This dialog box contains the following tabs e Screen A D a separate tab for each of the four available screens e Predefined for predefined display configurations Screen A D lt Display Config AM For each of the four available screens you can configure what is to be displayed To define the result display configuration for a screen select the corresponding tab For each screen you can define Display Settings x Screen
53. Link MK erred Detal sienen annaa iaiia a a E AE e AE a 69 Link TMe WANK EE 69 Link AF Spectrum MARKER TTT 69 Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta The Marker X softkey activates the corresponding marker and opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the marker to be set to Pressing the softkey again deactivates the selected marker If a marker value is changed using the rotary knob the step size is defined via the Stepsize Standard or Stepsize Sweep Points softkeys Marker 1 is always the reference marker for relative measurements If activated markers 2 to 16 are delta markers that refer to marker 1 These markers can be converted into markers with absolute value display using the Marker Norm Delta softkey If marker 1 is the active marker pressing the Marker Norm Delta softkey switches on an additional delta marker Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 102 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X on page 103 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y on page 105 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 167 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X on page 168 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative on page 168 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt Y on page 169 E Ze EI E More Markers Opens a sub menu to select one of up to 16 available markers See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta
54. Manual AF Gpechum 41 Demod BW TEE 41 Fall Spal IRF Spo UM TEE 41 AF Full Span AF Spectruim 00 cccectececcueneceecteeeqnaecnsteeencaesenceeesaansenestecneaseneseerenad 41 Span Manual RF Spectrum Opens an edit dialog box to enter the frequency span The center frequency is kept con stant If the RF spectrum display is active values between the sampling rate 1000 and the demodulation bandwidth are allowed Remote command SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum SPAN ZOOM on page 138 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 40 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 2 4 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 AF Span Manual AF Spectrum Opens an edit dialog box to enter the frequency range for the AF spectrum display Values between the sampling rate 1000 and the demodulation bandwidth 2 are allowed Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF SPAN on page 118 Demod BW Opens an edit dialog box to enter the demodulation bandwidth of the analog demodula tion The demodulation bandwidth determines the sampling rate for recording the signal to be analyzed For details on the relation between demodulation bandwidth and sampling rate refer to chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 143 Full Span RF Spectrum Sets the span to the maximum frequency range of the R amp
55. Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value to define the level spacing of the two temporary markers to the right and left of marker 1 default setting 3 dB Activates the temporary markers T1 and T2 The values of the temporary markers T1 T2 and the entered value ndB are displayed in the marker field If a positive value is entered the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active reference marker If a negative value e g for notch filter measurements is entered the markers T1 and T2 are placed above the active reference marker Marker T1 is placed to the left and marker T2 to the right of the reference marker In the marker table the following results are displayed Span setting Parameter name Description span gt 0 Bw frequency spacing of the two temporary markers Q factor quality of the displayed bandwidth value Bw span 0 PWid pulse width between the two temporary markers Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 71 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 If it is not possible to form the frequency spacing for the n dB value e g because of noise display dashes instead of a measured value are displayed Remote command CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD STAT ON see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe on page 100 CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD 3dB see CALCulate lt n
56. Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep offset gt 0 Start of the sweep is delayed offset lt 0 Sweep starts earlier pre trigger Only possible for span 0 e g UO Analyzer mode and gated trigger switched off Maximum allowed range limited by the sweep time pretriggerna sweep time When using the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 with UO Analyzer mode the maximum range is limited by the number of pretrigger samples See the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description in the base unit In the External or IF Power trigger mode a common input signal is used for both trigger and gate Therefore changes to the gate delay will affect the trigger delay trigger offset as well In the Time trigger mode this softkey is not available Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME on page 157 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 211 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Repetition Interval Opens an edit dialog box to define a repetition interval in which the measurement is triggered The shortest interval is 2 ms This softkey is only available if the trigger source Time is selected see Time on page 64 Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence TIME RINTerval on page 160 Trigger Hysteresis Defines t
57. S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 174 INPut EATT on page 173 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 111 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 171 Input 50 0 75 Q Uses 50 Q or 75 Q as reference impedance for the measured levels Default setting is 50 Q The setting 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction
58. S S ENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs STATe on page 146 ENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency on page 147 Low Pass AF Filter Opens the Low Pass selection list to select the filter type Relative and absolute low pass filter are available e Absolute low pass filters The 3 kHz 15 kHz 23 kHz and 150 kHz softkeys switch on a absolute low pass filter The filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 3 kHz 15 kHz and 23 kHz filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filters 30 dB octave The 150 kHz filter is designed as 8th order Butterworth filter 48 dB octave The absolute low pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 3 kHz 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 15 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz 23 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 150 kHz 400 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Note for FM stereo K7S all filters are active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Relative low pass filters The filters 3 dB can be selected in of the demodulation bandwidth The filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filter 30 dB octave and active for all demodulation bandwidths None deactivates the AF low pass filter Default is None Remote command S S Fl P m mi P SF ENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs STATe on page 147 ENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQ
59. S FSV K7 The temporary markers T1 and T2 are positioned n dB below the active reference marker The frequency and time position of these markers can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency and CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME The bandwidth between the markers can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Parameters lt Distance gt Example Selects the measurement window irrelevant Distance of the temporary markers to the reference marker in dB RST 6dB CALC MARK FUNC NDBD 3dB Sets the level spacing to 3 dB CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when meas uring in the frequency domain To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Return values lt Frequency gt Example Usage Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 Selects the measurement window irrelevant lt frequency 1 gt absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the left of the reference marker in Hz lt frequency 2 gt absolute frequency of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in Hz INIT CONT OFF
60. STATe on page 146 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency on page 147 Low Pass lt AF Filter AM Opens the Low Pass selection list to select the filter type Relative and absolute low pass filter are available e Absolute low pass filters The 3 kHz 15 kHz 23 kHz and 150 kHz softkeys switch on a absolute low pass filter The filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 3 kHz 15 kHz and 23 kHz Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 29 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filters 30 dB octave The 150 kHz filter is designed as 8th order Butterworth filter 48 dB octave The absolute low pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 3 kHz 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 15 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz 23 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 150 kHz 400 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Note for FM stereo K7S all filters are active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz e Relative low pass filters The filters 3 dB can be selected in of the demodulation bandwidth The filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filter 30 dB octave and active for all demodulation bandwidth S e None deactivates the AF low pass filter
61. Sample Absa isscsiscunticesatssacnissibbivasalsslendansanegededtasadesnedstaudiadeuisabicaas 76 EA EE 76 EE E T E E A E 77 L Adjust Reference Level to Full Scale Level 77 E EE 77 CN E 77 GE 77 L Send tala now E ae ee ease 77 MMBC EE 77 ERES ii EE 77 Le EE 78 Digital I MO enaner eair Kia iaaii AANKAN adar EER AEAN n 78 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 74 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 a ae a ee a a Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 171 Noise Source Switches the supply voltage for an external noise source on or off For details on con nectors refer to the R amp S FSV Quick Start Guide Front and Rear Panel chapter Remote command DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce on page 177 Video Output Sends a video output signal according to the measured level to the connector on the rear panel of the R amp S FSV Note Video output does not return valid values in IQ or FFT mode Remote command OUTP IF VID see OUTPut IF SOURce on page 175 Tracking Generator This softkey is only available if the R amp S FSV option Tracking Generator R amp S FSV B9 or External Tracking Generator R amp S FSV B10 or both are installed It is not availa
62. Unit KTS ienei onet 33 195 200 201 Unit remote control cseeeeeeeees 96 163 242 Unit DB K7 216 Video Outputs caine died Ani radenie kiia 75 Weighting remote control analog demodulation 144 145 X RBW remote control cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 149 X Span remote control ceeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeee 149 Zero Phase Reference Point KI 37 Zero Phase Reference Point remote control K7 133 Zoom remote control analog demodulation 139 AF Filter analog demodulation 29 50 204 Auto Pr EE 48 AUtO BE 48 Average 3 Average Mode sssssssessssessssssinsssrrsrrrssserrrrrnnsnsesens 59 BB Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control Center remote control Clear IN 15 56 Continue Single Sweep 0 cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 54 Continuous Sweep SS Continuous Sweep remote control s s seses 178 Cont Meas remote Control 178 Decim Sep remote control e eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 177 Deemphasis analog demodulation 31 53 193 207 le V 78 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 Index Reen le WEE 27 EL Atten Mode Auto Man remote control 173 174 El Atten On Off acarrean anas 45 202 lee 77 IF Power Retrigger Holdoff remote control 157 IF Power Retrigger Hysteresis remote control 157 Input AC DC ooo eect teneee
63. a a aaa 201 L Phase Unit Ra d De0 oaia aaraa Ae aA E Eae 201 e 1 EA 201 L Abs Dev Unit ki zid m 201 LRel Dev Unit EE 201 PRCA OOM EE 201 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual oense menin ee NEE 201 RF Atten Auto Mech E DEE 202 SE er KEE 202 EI Atten Mode Auto Man s 2 cccci ie et aed andl hace idles 202 Rof Level ONSE inaia aai aa aa i aaa aaa aa aiii 203 MOUNA CDO EE 203 FUE S0 OTS EE 203 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBuV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 110 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 198 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S AF Range Opens a submenu to define the diagram scaling for AF displays Dev per Division AF Range Opens an edit dialog box to set the modulation depth or the phase deviation R amp S FSV K7 only or frequency deviation per division AM display 0 0001 to 1000 FM display 1 Hz div to 100 MHz div PM display 0 0001 rad div to 1000 rad div The softkey is not available if logarithmic display is set Deviation Lin Log softkey Remote comman
64. a continuous stream This function requires the LVDS interface option R amp S FSV B17 Digital input and digital output cannot be used simultaneously Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example OUTP DIQ ON Mode ADEMOD IQ VSA Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 176 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 3 10 5 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 OUTPut TRIGger lt PortLevel gt This command selects level of the Trigger Out port Thus you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example Parameters lt PortLevel gt LOW HIGH RST LOW Example OUTP TRIG HIGH Other Commands FORMat DATA lt Format gt This command selects the data format for the data transmitted from the R amp S FSV to the controlling computer It is used for the transmission of trace data The data format of trace data received by the instrument is automatically recognized regardless of the format which is programmed See also TRACe lt n gt DATA on page 154 Parameters lt Format gt ASCii ASCII data are transmitted in plain text separated by commas REAL REAL data are transmitted as 32 bit IEEE 754 floating point num bers in the definite length block format RST ASCII Example FORM REAL 32 FORM ASC FORMat DEXPort DSEParator lt Separator gt This command defines which decimal separator decimal point or comma i
65. after a single sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps INIT CONM WAI Continues the measurement next 20 sequences and waits for the end INITiate lt n gt CONTinuous lt State gt This command determines whether the trigger system is continuously initiated continu ous or performs single measurements single The sweep is started immediately Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 178 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example INIT CONT OFF Switches the sequence to single sweep INIT CONT ON Switches the sequence to continuous sweep Mode all INITiate lt n gt IMMediate The command initiates a new measurement sequence With sweep count gt 0 or average count gt 0 this means a restart of the indicated number of measurements With trace functions MAXHold MINHold and AVERage the previous results are reset on restarting the measurement In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mod
66. amp S FSV K7S UNIT RDEV lt Unit gt Selects the unit for relative deviation measurements Parameters lt Unit gt DB PCT RST HZ Example UNIT RDEV PCT Mode SFM UNIT THD lt Mode gt Selects the unit for THD measurements Parameters lt Mode gt DB PCT RST DB Example UNIT THD PCT Mode ADEMOD SFM R amp S FSV K7 K7S List of Commands List of Commands EIN EE eer 96 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCionFl edRbOmt MA simumf PDEART een 164 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCionFlx edRbOmt 164 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOINKY ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesenaeeeseeneeeeenas 165 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz FUNGCionFixedtGTATel 165 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz EUNGCHon PhNOtse AUTO 166 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz FUNGCionPhNOtsetGTATel 166 CALCulate nz DEI Tamarker mz LINK 167 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF c cccceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeceaeeeceeeeeseaeeeeeeaeeesecaeeeseceeeeseeeeeseeeeseneeeeees 167 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe 168 CALC late lt n gt DELTamarkers m gt E 168 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarker mz SREL ative 168 CAL Culate lt n gt DEL Tamarker lt m gt 2 We geeegegkegesdkegeegue GOEN ecg veesan va cudeveatbebinesdiatistisnassasccssiaaceereeatacvestaatieeases 169 CAlCulate cnz D I TamarkermzfGTATel 167 E Ee RE 89 CALCulate lt n gt FORMa at 91 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker
67. and the demodulation bandwidth the number of recorded test points may be greater than that shown on the display If the zoom function is enabled the default number of sweep points in Spectrum mode of the result memory are displayed from the specified start time with SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt on page 139 If the zoom function is disabled data reduction is used to adapt the test points to the number of points available on the display Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example ADEM ZOOM ON Switches on the zoom function Mode ADEMOD SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt lt Time gt The command selects the start time for the display of individual measured values of the analog demodulation in the specified window The maximum possible value depends on the measurement time which is set in the instrument and can be queried with the SENSe ADEMod MTIMe on page 129 command Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 139 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 DEET Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 If the zoom function is enabled the default number of sweep points in Spectrum mode of the result memory are displayed from the specified start time with SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt on page 139 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt Time gt RST Os 0 s to measurement time
68. attenuation is programmed directly the coupling to the reference level is switched off This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt Value gt RST 10 dB AUTO is set to ON Example INP ATT 30dB Sets the attenuation on the attenuator to 30 dB and switches off the coupling to the reference level Mode all INPut ATTenuation AUTO lt State gt This command automatically couples the input attenuation to the reference level state ON or switches the input attenuation to manual entry state OFF This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 170 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 REESEN Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example INP ATT AUTO ON Couples the attenuation set on the attenuator to the reference level INPut COUPling lt CouplingType gt Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt CouplingType gt AC DC RST AC Example INP COUP DC INPut DIQ CDEVice This command queries the current configuration and the status of the digital baseband input from the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17
69. available 2 windows next to each other the summary is displayed as a list Thus the factory set predefined screen configurations contain only 3 screens 2 for diagrams and one full width screen for the summary For each channel the following information is provided Label Description Detector Selected detector type Result Mode Selected result mode Dev Deviation Rel to Ref Relative to reference Mod Freq Modulation frequency ree Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 183 R amp S FSV K7 K7S e a aes FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Label SINAD Description Signal to noise and distortion Measures the ratio of the total power to the power of noise and har monic distortions The noise and harmonic power is calculated inside the AF spectrum span The DC offset is removed before the calcula tion SINAD dB 20 lo total power noise distortion power THD Total harmonic distortion The ratio of the harmonics to the fundamental and harmonics All har monics inside the AF spectrum span are considered up to the tenth harmonic H THD aB 20 log 2 2U i l In addition the following general information for the input signal is provided e Carrier Power e Carrier Frequency e Reference Deviation e Cross Talk difference between left and right signal in dB see also CAL
70. command can be used are indicated by the following abbreviations Abbreviation Description A spectrum analysis A F spectrum analysis span gt 0 only frequency mode A T spectrum analysis zero span only time mode ADEMOD analog demodulation option R amp S FSV K7 BT Bluetooth option R amp S FSV K8 CDMA CDMA 2000 base station measurements option R amp S FSV K82 EVDO 1xEV DO base station analysis option R amp S FSV K84 GSM GSM Edge measurements option R amp S FSV K10 IO IQ Analyzer mode OFDM WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM measurements option R amp S FSV K93 OFDMA WiBro WiMAX IEEE 802 16e OFDMA WiBro measurements option R amp S FSV K93 NF Noise Figure measurements R amp S FSV K30 PHN Phase Noise measurements R amp S FSV K40 PSM Power Sensor measurements option R amp S FSV K9 SFM Stereo FM measurements optionR amp S FSV K7S SPECM Spectogram mode option R amp S FSV K14 TDS TD SCDMA base station UE measurements option R amp S FSV K76 K77 VSA Vector Signal Analysis option R amp S FSV K70 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 220 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S WCDMA 3GPP Base Station measurements option R amp S FSV K72 3GPP UE measure ments option R amp S FSV K73 WLAN WLAN TX measurements option R amp S FSV K91 The spectrum a
71. commands for the definition of frequency and level settings when measuring the specific channels of FM stereo sig nals SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt AFSPectrum TYPE ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaeaeaeaeenenetenenes 228 ISENGe GEM Channelfvpez AFGbechum RESu nn neneorosrrnrereretorernrnnnnene 229 IGENGeISGEM Channelfvpez El TerAwWEiobtedSTATel rer eeerorsrsrrsrre nenene 229 ISGENZGe GEM Channelfvpez FlTerCCTTt TATe renner rnrr rer erorernsrnene 230 IGENGeISGEM Channelfvpez El TerCCIRUNVWelobtedlt STATel 230 IGENGe GEM Channelfvpez El TerCORWEIGhtedt GTATel nene 230 ISENGe GEM Channelfvpez FEIL TerCOUlbltmg 231 IGENGe GEM Channelfvpez FlTerDEMbhasls GTATe rere rerrorsrnrene nene 231 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer DEMPhasis TCOhNstant nenene 231 IGENGe GEM Channelfvpez FlTerHbp hGeG ate erre ossrrrererororesennne 232 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer HPASs ER Ouency er ererororsrnsnrenrnene 232 ISENGe GEM Channelfvpez FlTerb AGeGraTe 232 IGENGe GEM Channelfvpez FlTerbAGeEREOuency nereo rrsrrererorerrnene 233 ISENZGe GEM Channelfvpez FlTerb AGetREOuencvt ABGohutel neeese 233 IGENGe GEM Channelfvpez FlTerbAGeEREOuencv RE ative ere rereee nene 234 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary COUbilmg er teoeornsnrenererorsrenenene 234 IGENGe GEM ChannelfvpezRGUlMmarv DE TechotFUNCHon nenene esenee nene 234 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary MODE ssssssssesensnnsnsososssrsnrnrerere
72. configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 47 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Dee Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 O Adjusting settings automatically during triggered measurements When you select an auto adjust function a measurement is performed to determine the optimal settings If you select an auto adjust funtion for a triggered measurement you can select how the R amp S FSV should behave e default The measurement for adjustment waits for the next trigger e The measurement for adjustment is performed without waiting for a trigger The trigger source is temporarily set to Free Run After the measurement is com pleted the original trigger source is restored The trigger level for IF Power and RF Power triggers is adjusted as follows Trigger Level Reference Level 15 dB AUCA ie A dad anal aati end 48 AUO Ne DEET 48 PRU OVEN E 48 US EE 48 L Meas Time Manual 49 L Meas TIME dn Nee aioli sadn isis nimasitutbuns 49 L Upper Level Hveteresls ENNEN 49 L Lower Level Hvsteresis EE 49 AF Auto lecken aa fee caisson Een Adnan ca deeds ae 49 Auto All Performs all automatic settings e Auto Freq on page 48 e Auto Level on page 48 Remote command SENSe ADJust ALL on page 1
73. eeh Ei 144 IEN Ge El Terzns AuWEIobtedSTATel 144 IEN Ge El Tercns COCIR WEIGhted STATel 145 IEN Ge El Tercns CCIRIUNWeiobtedt GTATel 145 SENSe FIET ersin gt CCU arinina aaraa aa a cede tess adda acento attendees Ge tenes 145 IEN Ge Eil Tercnz DEMbhasis TCOhNstant A 146 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis STATe SENSe FIL Ter lt n FHPASS FREQUCNCY scisiccccessscessecnsoccesncassscnscteoeseseconesntssescusacccusscd UE Areak unaia eiiD ENTES SENSe FILTersn gt iHPASSESTAT KEE SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELAative ccc eee ceeeeeseeceeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeceeeneeseeeesseeeeseesnaees 148 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency ABSolute cece cee ceeesee sense cease seaeeseeesseeeeeaeesseessseeseaeeseaees 147 SENSe FILTer lt n LPASS S TAT ejinrin eai a a aaa ada aAA Edaen iS 147 SENSe FREQuency CENTer SENSe FREQu ncy CENTer STEP eet gEuEEeEeeE keete 149 IGENGe IEbREOuencv CENTer STER UNK 149 IEN Ge IFbREOuencv CENTer STEP UNK FACTor 149 IGENGe GEM Channelfvpez AFGbectum RE Gu 229 IGENGe GEM Channelfvpoez AFGbectum TE SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer AWEighted STATe IGENGe ISGEM Channelfvpez Fil TerCGCRWElGbtedtST ATel 230 IEN Ge ISGEM Channelfvpez Fi TerCcCRtUNWegabtedlfGTATel 230 IEN Ge ISGEM Channelfvpe Hl TerCGcCTt TATe 230 IEN Ge GEM Channelfvpoez FEIL TerCGOUlblmg 231 IGENZGe IGEM Channelfvpez FlTerDEMhasis GTATe 231 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILT
74. for pulsed carriers is possible even if the carrier lies outside the selected frequency span Remote command TRIG SOUR IFP see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 SWE EGAT SOUR IFP for gated triggering see SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 151 FM lt Trigger Source Triggers on the specified frequency level of the FM signal Remote command TRIG SEQ SOUR FM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 AM lt Trigger Source Triggers on the specified modulation depth of the AM signal Remote command TRIG SEQ SOUR AMR see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 PM lt Trigger Source Triggers on the specified phase of the PM signal Remote command TRIG SEQ SOUR PM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 RF Trigger Source Triggers on the specified level of the RF signal Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 63 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Dee Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Note The RF offline trigger is based on the UO data of the demodulated signal limited to the demodulation bandwidth For a wider trigger bandwidth and triggering based on the currently measured RF input signal use the more powerful RF Power trigger Remote command TRIG SEQ SOUR AM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 Time Trigger Source Opens an edit dialog box to de
75. gt 0 T1 for zero span The search is performed between the lines of the left and right limit see also Right Limit softkey Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT on page 103 Right Limit Marker Peak List Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the upper limit left vertical line S2 for span gt 0 T2 for zero span The search is performed between the lines of the left and right limit see also Left Limit softkey If no value is set the upper limit corresponds to the stop frequency Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT on page 104 Threshold Marker Peak List Opens an edit dialog box to define the threshold line The threshold line represents the lower level limit for a Peak search and the upper level limit for a Min search Remote command CALCulate lt n gt THReshold STATe on page 95 CALCulate lt n gt THReshold on page 95 ASCII File Export Marker Peak List Opens the ASCII File Export Name dialog box and saves the active peak list in ASCII format to the specified file and directory The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data section containing the marker data For details on an ASCII file see chapter 2 1 10 ASCII File Export Format on page 23 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 218 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S 3 2 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 Remote Commands of the F
76. gt CCIR UNWeighted STATe lt State gt This command activates deactivates the unweighted CCIR filter in the specified window For details on the unweighted CCIR filter see CCIR Unweighted on page 31 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIR UNW ON Activates the unweighted CCIR filter Mode ADEMOD SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe lt State gt This command activates deactivates the weighted CCIR filter in the specified window For details on the weighted CCIR filter see CCIR Weighted on page 31 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIR WEIG ON Activates the weighted CCIR filter Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 145 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Mode ADEMOD SENSe FIlLTer lt n gt DEMPhasis STATe lt State gt This command activates deactivates the selected deemphasis in the specified window For details about deemphasis refer to Deemphasis on page 31 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT DEMP ON Activates the selected deemphasis Mode ADEMOD SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCONstant This command selects the deemphasis in the specified window For details on deemphasis refer to Deemphasis on page 31
77. le EE 197 EE 197 ee Te EE 197 E EE 197 e 197 Pilt EE 197 Be EE 198 Display GIANG EE 198 Left Displays the left signal of the FM stereo input and the Left submenu Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Display Config Left You configure the display settings for the results in the Display Configuration dialog box This dialog box contains the following tabs e Screen A D a separate tab for each of the four available screens Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 185 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S e Predefined for predefined display configurations Display Configuration f x Screen C Off E Summary RF Diagrams RF Time Domain RF Spectrum FM Stereo Diagrams Left Time Domain C Left Spectrum Right Time Domain C Right Spectrum C MPX Time Domain MPX Spectrum C Mono Time Domain C Mono Spectrum Stereo Time Domain Stereo Spectrum RDS Time Domain RDS Spectrum Pilot Time Domain Pilot Spectrum Screen A D Display Config Left For each of the four available screens you can configure what is to be displayed To define the Display Configuration for a screen select the corresponding tab For each screen you can define e Off Whether it is displayed or not e Summary Whether a summary of the evaluation lists from all screens is disp
78. lt Impedance gt This command selects the nominal input impedance Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 174 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 3 10 3 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 750 500 This function is not available if the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt Impedance gt 50 75 RST 50 Q Example INP IMP 75 INPut SELect lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for measurements Parameters lt Source gt RF DIQ RF Radio Frequency RF INPUT connector DIQ Digital IQ only available with R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 RST RF Example INP SEL RF Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN MMEMory subsystem MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST lt FileName gt This command stores the current list evaluation results ina lt file name gt dat file The file consists of a data section containing the list evaluation results Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt FileName gt lt file name gt Example MMEM STOR LIST test Stores the current list evaluation results in the test dat file
79. lt TraceMode1 gt lt TraceMode2 gt lt TraceMode3 gt lt Trace Mode4 gt lt TraceMode5 gt lt TraceMode6 gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW OFF For details on trace modes see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 RST WRITe OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FM Stereo OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Example ADEM AM AVER MAXH MINH OFF OFF OFF Determines average max hold and min hold values simultane ously for the traces 1 3 ADEM AM WRIT OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Determines only the current measurement values for trace 1 ADEM AM OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Switches AM demodulation off Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod AM RELative TDOMain TYPE lt TraceMode gt This command selects the result types to be measured simultaneously by AM demodu lation Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 121 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters for setting and query lt TraceMode gt lt TraceMode1 gt lt TraceMode2 gt lt TraceMode3 gt lt Trace Mode4 gt lt TraceMode5 gt lt TraceMode6 gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW OFF For details on trace modes see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 RST WRITe OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF FM Stereo OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Example ADEM AM REL AVER MAXH MINH Determines average max hold and min hold values
80. marker values for the delta marker are indicated relative to the specified reference marker The reference marker can either be another active marker or a fixed reference marker FXD see Ref Fixed on page 70 Trace for which the marker is to be set Remote command CALCulate lt n gt CALCulate lt n gt CALCulate lt n gt CALCulate lt n gt CALCulate lt n gt M D D MARKer lt m gt STATe on page 102 DELTamarker lt m gt STATe on page 167 ARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 102 ELTamarker lt m gt TRACe on page 168 ELTamarker lt m gt MREF on page 167 All Marker Off Marker Wizard Switches all markers off It also switches off all functions and displays that are associated with the markers delta markers Remote comman CALCulate lt n gt Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 d MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 96 06 67 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 All Marker Off Switches all markers off It also switches off all functions and displays that are associated with the markers delta markers Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF on page 96 Marker Table Defines how the marker information is displayed For more information see Displayed Marker Information in the description of the base unit On Displays the marker information in a table in a separate area beneath the diagram Off Display
81. measured ADEM AM REL WRIT OFF OFF see SENSe ADEMod FM AFSPectrum TYPE on page 127 Selects the AM results to be measured ADEM PM AFSP WRIT OFF OFF see SENSe ADEMod PM AFSPectrum TYPE on page 131 Selects the AF spectrum results of the demodulated PM signal to be measured ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches the demodulator on INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for termination FORM ASC see FORMat DATA on page 177 Selects output format ADEM PM RES AVER see SENSe ADEMod PM AFSPectrum RESult on page 132 Reads PM average result data ADEM PM RES MAXH see SENSe ADEMod PM AFSPectrum RESult on page 132 Reads PM maxhold result data ADEM PM RES MINH see SENSe ADEMod PM AFSPectrum RESult on page 132 Reads PM minhold result data ADEM AM RES WRIT see SENSe ADEMod PM AFSPectrum RESult on page 132 Reads current AM result data ADEM PM AFSP RES WRIT Reads current AF spectrum result data of demodulated PM signal ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod PM RPOint X lt Time gt This command determines the position where the phase of the PM demodulated signal is set to 0 rad The maximum possible value depends on the measurement time selected in the instrument this value is output in response to the query ADEM PM
82. measurements Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt StepSize gt STANdard step size corresponds to space between two pixels POINts step size corresponds to space between two measured values number of measured values is defined via the SENSe lt n gt SWEep POINts command see SENSe SWEep POINts on page 152 RST POINts Example CALC MARK X SSIZ STAN Sets the measured value step size CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt Y This command queries the measured value of a marker The corresponding marker is activated before or switched to marker mode if necessary To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps If the analog demodulator option Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 is activated the query result is output in the following units Result display Output unit AM FM Hz PM rad deg defined with CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe on page 95 RF dB Range Log or Range Linear Range Linear dB Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 105 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 3 3 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 lt m gt Selects the marker Return values lt Result gt The measured value of
83. n gt MARKer lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns markers on and off If the corresponding marker number is currently active as a deltamarker it is turned into a normal marker Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Parameters lt State gt Example Selects the measurement window depends on mode Selects the marker ON OFF RST OFF CALC MARK3 ON Switches on marker 3 or switches to marker mode CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe lt Trace gt This command selects the trace a marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 102 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 If necessary the corresponding marker is switched on prior to the assignment Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode Selects the marker Parameters lt Trace gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC MARK3 TRAC 2 Assigns marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X lt Position gt This command positions a marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis If marker 2 3 or 4 is selected and used as delta marker it is switched to marker mode Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Position gt Numeric value that def
84. on page 66 Marker to Trace Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of the trace on which the marker is to be placed Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe on page 102 Marker Wizard Opens a configuration dialog for markers The marker wizard allows you to configure and activate up to 16 different markers in one dialog The first 8 markers are displayed on one tab the last 8 markers on a second tab For each marker the following settings are available Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 66 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Marker Configuration Marker 1 8 Selected State kel br z DI oO S bi oO bd SE Z rmal Delta J to SE H rmall Delta J to 1 on on BALES to 1 H oun 4 gt BALED to SE ILR to 1 H e 3 mal ALG omori Normal AED to 1 ont BALED to EE i On Off Pe to 1 All Marker Off Selected State Normal Delta Ref Marker Trace When you press the Selected or State field the corresponding marker is activated and the marker row is highlighted Defines whether it is a normal marker or delta marker For delta markers you can define a reference marker Reference marker for delta markers The
85. out a list of comma separated values CSV of the measured values in floating point format Reading out data in binary format is quicker than in ASCII format Thus binary format is recommended for large amounts of data Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 The command reads out binary data Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 each measurement value being formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point For mat Depending on the number of samples to be transferred 2 different kinds of syntax are used For 1010 samples The schema of the result string is as follows lt NoOfDigits gt lt NoOfDataBytes gt lt valuel gt lt value2 gt lt value n gt with Header prefix 1 byte lt NoOfDigits gt Number of digits of the following number of data bytes 4 in the example 1 byte lt NoOfDataBytes gt Number of following data bytes in decimal form 1024 in the example 1 9 bytes lt Value gt Data values each one is a 4 byte floating point value Example 41024 lt valuel gt lt value2 gt lt value 256 gt 4 the following number of data bytes has 4 digits 1024 1024 Bytes of following data float 4 Bytes value gt 1024 4 256 values 128 and 128 Q values lt value x gt 4 Byte values must be interpreted as float Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 155 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 3 8 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodu
86. page 71 Ref Point Frequency span gt 0 Ref Point Time zero span on page 71 and Peak Search on page 71 When set to ON all delta markers which previously referenced marker 1 are automatically set to reference the fixed marker The reference marker assignment can be changed using the Marker Wizard see Marker Wizard on page 66 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed STATe on page 165 Ref Point Level Ref Fixed Opens an edit dialog box to enter a reference level value All relative level values of the delta markers refer to this reference level Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y on page 165 Ref Point Frequency span gt 0 Ref Point Time zero span Ref Fixed Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency reference or time value All relative fre quency or time values of the delta markers refer to this frequency reference For phase noise measurement input of reference time is not possible Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X on page 164 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 213 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S DEE Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Peak Search Ref Fixed Sets the maximum value of the selected trace as the reference point Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint MAXimum P
87. remote control Marker 2 remote Control ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeees 167 Marker 3 remote Control cceeeeeeeeeeeeetteeeees Marker 4 remote control Aliens Marker Norm Delta eee ceeeeeeneeteneeeeeeeeeee Marker Norm Delta remote control 001e 167 Marker Stepsize is Marker Stepsize remote control cceeeee 105 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 Index Marker Table Off On Aut remote control 106 Marker Table On Off ees cette eeeeeeeee Marker to Trace remote control Marker WIZaId oi sccsccccsssccsesecsceccsescosscssessntecssceesesesees Marker Zoom remote Control Meas Time Auto Meas Time Manual 0 0 ecee neeese More Markets spririts nnns n dB down n dB down remote control NOISE Soe sic ies icceccasscceserenedsdepecspineeucisseersisesacstseaters Noise Src On Off remote control Peak EXcursion v ccsscissccessevecsscatcntecescseseesssenestes Peak Excursion remote control sseeeee Peak Search Peak Search remote control 0 08 Phase NoiSe geet greEeeEERRe aiin Phase Unit Rad Deg K7 34 44 195 200 201 Phase Wrap On Off KI 37 Phase Wrap On Off remote control analog demodula le TEE Ph Noise Ref Fixed remote control R amp S SUpPOrt E Range Lin Unit Se Range Lin Unit remote Control Range
88. rounded to the next lower integer value To re open the edit dialog box for manual value definition select the Man mode again If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 174 INPut EATT on page 173 Ref Level Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the arithmetic level offset This offset is added to the measured level irrespective of the selected unit The scaling of the y axis is changed accordingly The setting range is 200 dB in 0 1 dB steps Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet on page 111 Ref Level Position Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level position i e the position of the maximum AD converter value on the level axis The setting range is from 200 to 200 0 corresponding to the lower and 100 to the upper limit of the diagram Only available for RF measurements Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 111 Grid Abs Rel Switches between absolute and relative scaling of the level axis not available with Linear range Only available for RF measurements Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 46 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 2 5 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Abs Absolute s
89. start working with the instrument Basic operations and basic measurements are described Also a brief introduction to remote control is given The manual includes general information e g Safety Instruc tions and the following chapters Chapter 1 Introduction General information Chapter 2 Front and Rear Panel Chapter 3 Preparing for Use Chapter 4 Firmware Update and Installation of Firmware Options Chapter 5 Basic Operations Chapter 6 Basic Measurement Examples Chapter 7 Brief Introduction to Remote Control Appendix Printer Interface Appendix LAN Interface Operating Manuals The Operating Manuals are a supplement to the Quick Start Guide Operating Manuals are provided for the base unit and each additional software option The Operating Manual for the base unit provides basic information on operating the R amp S FSV in general and the Spectrum mode in particular Furthermore the software options that enhance the basic functionality for various measurement modes are descri bed here The set of measurement examples in the Quick Start Guide is expanded by more advanced measurement examples In addition to the brief introduction to remote control in the Quick Start Guide a description of the basic analyzer commands and pro gramming examples is given Information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages is also provided Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 5 R amp S FSV
90. sweep and waits for its end CALC DELT2 ON Switches on delta marker 2 CALC DELT2 Y Outputs measurement value of delta marker 2 Usage Query only Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 169 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 EE 2 3 10 2 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 INPut subsystem INPUBAT Tenue edd ccc decdsacnckscwuianenascin dene vaetdddansvakecdsiatessadeadeadoaecedvehedawadsdtaavdenad dunes 170 INPUEAT TEnUatiOnt AUTO EE 170 r ere EE 171 T i eet Te Dee EE 171 INPUt DIO RANGE COUPIMO iiinis ia E a E a 172 INPUtEDIQ RANGe LUPPEN eearri annaran enn iaaiaee aake aaea anaa E Eanan 172 INPUt DIO RANGEFUPP KT LU EE 173 INPUT DIG SRAM EE 173 INPUGEAT Foces a a a A a A aE EEA a AEAEE 173 INPO EATT AUTO EE 174 Elle ET KHN 174 ler SIS EE 174 Wl E e e A EEA EE EEEE au adentcas da teaai ceva T EA A E E 175 INPut ATTenuation lt Value gt This command programs the input attenuator To protect the input mixer against damage from overloads the setting 0 dB can be obtained by entering numerals not by using the DOWN command The attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps If the defined reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly In the default state with Spectrum mode the attenuation set on the step attenuator is coupled to the reference level of the instrument If the
91. the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys e To jump to the linked topic press the link text on the touchscreen Searching for a topic 1 Change to the Index tab Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 8 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Preface EE How to Use the Help System 2 Enter the first characters of the topic you are interested in The entries starting with these characters are displayed 3 Change the focus by pressing the ENTER key 4 Select the suitable keyword by using the UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW keys or the rotary knob 5 Press the ENTER key to display the help topic The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed Changing the zoom 1 Change to the Zoom tab 2 Set the zoom using the rotary knob Four settings are available 1 4 The smallest size is selected by number 1 the largest size is selected by number 4 Closing the help window gt Press the ESC key or a function key on the front panel Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 9 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 2 Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Overview of firmware option R amp S FSV K7 This section contains all information required for operation of an R amp S FSV equipped with Application Firmware R amp S FSV K7 It covers operation via menus and the remote control commands for analog demodulation measurements This part of the docu
92. the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR UNWeighted STATe on page 145 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCIR UNWeighted STATe on page 230 CCIR Weighted Weighting AF Filter Switches on the CCIR weighted filter The weighting filter is active in the following demod ulation bandwidth range 100 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 0 MHz For FM stereo K7S the filter is active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe on page 145 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCIR WEIGhted STATe on page 230 A Weighted Weighting AF Filter Switches on the A weighted filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodu lation bandwidth range Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 206 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S 100 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 800 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt AWEighted STATe on page 144 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer AWEighted STATe on page 229 Deemphasis AF Filter Opens the Deemphasis selection list to switch on a deemphasis with the given time constant The deemphasis is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range Note For FM stereo measurements K7S the dem
93. the selected marker is returned Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 Y Outputs the measured value of marker 2 Usage Query only DISPlay Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The DISPLay subsystem controls the selection and presentation of textual and graphic information as well as of measurement data on the display DISPlayiMMlABI EE 106 BISPlayPWiNDiowsne ST Ad Eei naaa a a a aaia aiai 107 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SUBWindow lt 1 2 gt SEL Ct 0c cceceeeeee eee eaeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeaneeeeees 107 DISPlayEWINDowsn e SSELECt 5 scsccret cies EENS tales 107 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE cccececcece cae ee eee eeeeeeteteeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeaeaaeaeaaateneeeees 108 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectt TATel rnrn rn reren ererererorrererersrnennn nnmn 109 DISPlay WiINDow lt n TRACE lt t SCALE ccc ccctseseienccecnencteedadescyenensandcadevesesaanncdundueseas 109 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelMODE nuren ererererrersrernrns enn 109 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtiNUOUS ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeaeneneees 110 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectlSCALelRLEVel 110 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet 00 c cceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeees 111 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSItION eee eeeeeeeee
94. the signal must exceed before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel1 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 141 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 REENERT Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt Threshold gt Range 0 to 200 RST 1 dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST UPP 2 For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level rises above 22 dBm SENSe JADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation lt Duration gt This command defines the duration of the level measurement used to determine the optimal reference level automatically for SENS ADJ LEV ON Parameters lt Duration gt lt numeric value gt in seconds Range 0 001 to 16000 0 RST 0 001 Default unit s Example ADJ CONF LEV DUR 5 SENSe JADJust FREQuency This command defines the center frequency automatically by determining the highest level in the frequency span Example ADJ FREQ SENSe JADJust LEVel This command automatically sets the optimal reference level for the current measure ment You can define a threshold that the signal must exceed before the reference level is adjusted see SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer and SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer
95. time values span 0 Lvi sorting in ascending order of the level Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT on page 97 Max Peak Count Marker Peak List Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE on page 93 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 72 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Peak Excursion Marker Peak List Opens an edit dialog box for level measurements to enter the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB For more information see Specifying the suitable peak excursion and Effect of different peak excursion settings Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 101 Left Limit Marker Peak List Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the lower limit left vertical line S1 for span gt 0 T1 for zero span The search is performed between the lines of the left and right limit see also Right Limit softkey Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT on page 103 Right Limit Marker Peak List Opens an edit dial
96. value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 75 O 50 Q All levels specified in this Operating Manual refer to the default setting of the instrument 50 Q This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 174 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu BW Key R amp S FSV K7S The following table shows all softkeys available in the Bandwidth menu in FM Stereo mode BW key Res BW span gt EE 204 Meas TMG E 204 PA GY ai onset od es nas ei ee a nie eet le 204 L High PRG eet Ee ee 204 Geert 205 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 203 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S e Ss TAE AAE N EEE AAEE EAE ETETE EAE 205 E chy iG E E A E A E AA 206 e E EE 206 L CCIR Unwaged iaia an a a E 206 Ce Wehe EE 206 L A Weighted cecinere iiinn aE E ATA RATT 206 Seene 207 PAIN PAF PANS EE 207 Res BW span gt 0 Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the resolution bandwidth The range is specified in the data sheet This softkey is only available for spectrum measurements see chapter 2 1 9 Measure ment Result Display on page 20 Remote command SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 135 Meas Time Opens an editor for entering the measurement time of the analog demodulation For details on the measurement time values r
97. 1 and Delta1 The delta marker 1 is linked to marker 1 so if the x axis value of the marker 1 is changed the delta marker 1 will follow on the same x position The link is off by default You can set the two markers on different traces to measure the difference e g between a max hold trace and a min hold trace or between a measurement and a reference trace Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK on page 167 Link Time Marker Links the markers in all time domain diagrams Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 94 Link AF Spectrum Marker Links the markers in all AF spectrum displays Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt LINK on page 94 Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu MKR FUNC Key R amp S FSV K7 The following table shows all softkeys available in the Marker Function menu Selot MACON NO 200ESReesEdeERRE EE RSR dannetiuate eg hataaneundshatangeetesbananivestasdiaas 70 lee ebe EE 70 PROT FIMO DEE 70 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 69 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 RHR Fred EE 70 LRef Pn EEN 71 L Ref Point Frequency span gt 0 Ref Point Time Zero span 71 Le Peak SOAR A E 71 MaB GON EE 71 Marker Peak LiStenisiieniinaneennad n A A AE A AA a 72 L Peak UST EE 72 L Sort Mode Frey yl NEEN 72 L Max Peak Count tatka tn tataraara ninnan aea ranar nr annn
98. 2 3 4 5 6 gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW OFF for details see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 The result type AF spectrum of the FM demodulated signal can not be activated at the same time as AF spectrum of AM or PM demodulated signal ADEM FM AFSP AVER MAXH MINH Determines average maximum and minimum value simultane ously ADEM FM AFSP WRIT OFF OFF Determines only current measurement results ADEM FM AFSP OFF OFF OFE Switches calculation of AF spectrum off ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod FM AFSPectrum RESult lt Type gt This command reads out the AF spectrum result data of the FM demodulated signal for the specified result type The data format of the output data is determined with the FOR Mat command Return values lt Type gt Return values Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 lt result type gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold for details see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 The specified result type must be one of those configured with the SENSe ADEMod FM AFSPectrum TYPE command Oth erwise a query error will be generated ASCII Format FORMat ASCII or Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 for details see chapter 2 3 6 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 115 Default unit dB logarithmic display or Hz linear display 127 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R am
99. 21 ISENSeIADEMod AM BEL atvet TDOMainltTepE 121 ISENGeJADE Mod AM REL attvel TDOMainl RE Gul 122 ISGENGeJADEMod AM REL ative AF Gbechumt TpEI nen ererorororssrsnnnnnnenene 123 ISENGeJADEMod AM REL ative AF Gbechum RESu eree oeorrrnrnrererorerernnnnene 124 IGENSGeIADEMod BANDwidl BW DE Modulaton sere cece eee eee eeaeeaeeeee 125 SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation TYPE 125 ISENSeIADEMod EMETDOMainTTEE 125 ISENSeIADEMod EMTDOMaint RESu cesesessescsssesecsescssceveesseesesevenscesevatetsesssenas 126 SENSe JADEMod FM AFSPecthum T EE n aaaeaii kaan 127 SENSeJADEMod FM AFPSPecttum RESUME oanien iiaeia aaa 127 BENS ADEMOd Ee eseu 128 ISENSGHADEMOGIMTIME riinas ainia iduna aaa a aaa aaa aa E A Aa aD 129 ISENSeIADEMod PMETDOMaintTEEL 129 ISENSeIADEMod PMETDOMaintRESuh 130 SENSe JADEMod PM AFSPectrumil Y PE neien a aE Aa aa 131 SENSe JADEMod PM AFSPectrum RESult niaan iania aieiaa 132 ISENSeIADEMod PM RBbOnttNL 133 ISENSeIADEMod RL ENG 134 ISENSEHADEMOGISE EE 134 IGENSeIADEMod SPECHmumtTpEt cesses seesessvacsasevenstevansvstesenseeess 135 ISGENGeJADE Mod GE Cirom BANDwidOblBWIDODTRE Golutton 135 SENSeJADEMed SPECtUIN RE SUI eriin a a a AAA 136 SENS ADEMod SPECtr um SPANE MAXIMUM ciiir canei 137 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 a a a a Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 IENGe LADEMod GbtCirum SPAN ZOOM A 138 Ee E Re ECH E RE 138
100. 3 dB can be selected in of the demodulation bandwidth The filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filter 30 dB octave and active for all demodulation bandwidths None deactivates the AF low pass filter Default is None Remote command S S Fl P m mi P SF ENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs STATe on page 147 ENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency ABSolute on page 147 ENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative on page 148 ENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs STATe on page 232 ENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs FREQuency on page 233 Weighting AF Filter Left Opens the Weighting selection list to select the weighting AF filter Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 191 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S None Weighting AF Filter Left Deactivates the weighting filter This is the default setting Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs STATe on page 146 CCITT Weighting AF Filter Left Switches on a CCITT P 53 weighting filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 20 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz For FM stereo K7S the filter is active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT on page 145 SFM SENSe S
101. 41 Auto Freq Defines the center frequency automatically by determining the highest frequency level in the frequency span This function uses the signal counter thus it is intended for use with sinusoidal signals This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command SENSe ADJust FREQuency on page 142 Auto Level Defines the optimal reference level for the current measurement automatically The measurement time for automatic leveling can be defined using the Settings softkey Remote command SENSe ADJust LEVel on page 142 Settings Opens a submenu to define settings for automatic leveling Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 48 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Dee 2 2 6 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Possible settings are e Meas Time Manual on page 49 e Meas Time Auto on page 49 Meas Time Manual lt Settings Opens an edit dialog box to enter the duration of the level measurement in seconds The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level softkey Auto Level on page 48 The default value is 1 ms Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURation on page 142 Meas Time Auto lt Settings The level measurement is used to determine the optimal reference level automatically see the Auto Level so
102. 6 02 06 201 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S DEET Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S levelmixer lEVelinput RF attenuation Note As of firmware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 170 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 170 El Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Att
103. 7S Select Trace ki 28 Le EE 48 Single Meas remote control si Single Sweep remote control eessss ceecee 179 Sort Mode Freq Lvl remote control 0 0 93 97 Span Manual analog demodulation Softkey Span Manual remote control Ki Start KT EE Stepsize Standard Stepsize Standard remote control ereenn Stepsize Sweep Points cccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees Stepsize Sweep Points remote control Sweep COUNT sisiran enin ane i ea a EE eSa ad Sweep POMS rsca taa ala aes Sweep Points remote control a se ceesre THD Unit DB KI 34 44 195 200 201 THD Unit DB remote control 96 163 243 Hl 218 Threshold remote Control cc eceeeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 95 Trace 1 2 3 4 5 6 remote control assesses 109 Trace Mode remote control 109 Tracking Generator ccccccccecceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeees 74 Trg Gate Level remote control screenees 160 Trg Gate Polarity Pos Neg remote control 150 161 Trg Gate Source remote control 0 00 151 159 Trigger Holdoff remote control 157 Trigger Offset analog demodulation 00s 0000seeese 64 Trigger Out Low High remote control A 177 Trigger Polarity 211 Trigger Source analog demodulation 62 Trigger Source KTS ssssseseeessssssresssessrsrrrsserreenes 208 Trigger Source remote control ki 240
104. A tibet E A 40 Center Opens an edit dialog box to enter the center frequency The allowed range of values for the center frequency depends on the frequency span span gt 0 SPAN min 2 lt S foenter s fmax ES SPAN min 2 span 0 0 HZ lt foenter fmax fmax and span i are specified in the data sheet Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer on page 148 CF Stepsize Opens a submenu to set the step size of the center frequency Apart from the Center andManual softkeys the other softkeys are displayed depending on the selected fre quency span Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 38 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 The step size can be coupled to the span span gt 0 or the demodulation bandwidth span 0 or it can be manually set to a fixed value 0 1 Span RF Spectrum CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the span Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 149 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 149 0 1 Demod BW AF RF Time Domain AF Spectrum CF Stepsize Sets the step size for the center frequency to 10 of the demodulation bandwidth This is the default setting Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK on page 149 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor on page 149
105. Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 2 3 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 This function is especially useful for measurements of the signal harmonics In this case each stroke of the arrow key selects the center frequency of another harmonic Manual CF Stepsize Opens an edit dialog box to enter a fixed step size for the center frequency Remote command SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP on page 149 AF Center AF Spectrum Opens an edit box to enter the center frequency within the AF spectrum Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF CENTer on page 117 AF Start Opens an edit box to define the start frequency within the AF spectrum Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF STARt on page 119 AF Stop Opens an edit box to define the stop frequency within the AF spectrum The maximum AF stop frequency corresponds to half the demodulation bandwidth Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF STOP on page 119 Softkeys of the Span Menu SPAN Key R amp S FSV K7 The following table shows all softkeys available in the Span menu in Analog Demod ulation mode SPAN key It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or mea surement mode this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description Span Manual RF eet ee RA ERRA EE 40 AF Span
106. CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ RANGe COUPIling lt State gt If enabled the reference level for digital input is adjusted to the full scale level automat ically if the fullscale level changes This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP DIQ RANG COUP OFF Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer lt Level gt Defines or queries the Full Scale Level i e the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 It can be defined either in dBm or Volt see Full Scale Level on page 76 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 172 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt Range 70 711 nV to 7 071 V RST 1V Example INP DIQ RANG 1V Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer UNIT lt Unit gt Defines the unit of the full scale leve
107. CII Trace export to support evaluation programs e g MS Excel in different languages The values dec imal point and comma can be set Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 177 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu TRIG Key R amp S FSV K7 The following table shows all softkeys available in the Trigger menu in Analog Demod ulation mode TRIG key It is possible that your instrument configuration does not pro vide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measure ment mode this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description Ree 62 L Free Run 62 E EE 62 GREEN 62 Eeer ee 63 ea EE 63 DEENEN 63 e AE 63 e ese ace A E a ts ered icra de tates anton tints sb ara i eee ici 63 SEA 64 TAG GSH EE 64 Tagger E 64 MUGS E 64 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 61 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Repetition Interval s i euebteddeegtegEen deeg EE dee Eet ee geed 65 Tagger KT 65 Tagger e TEE 65 Trigger Source Opens the Trg Source submenu to select the trigger source In Analog Demodulation mode the next measurement is triggered if the selected input signal exceeds the threshold specified using the Trigger Level softkey see Trigger Level on page 64 A periodic signal modulated onto the carrier frequency can be displayed in this way It is recommended tha
108. Culate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion SFM lt ChannelType gt RESult lt m gt on page 226 Softkeys of the FM Stereo Menu MEAS key K7S This section describes all softkeys available in the FM Stereo menu Ei SE 185 L Display EE 185 GE EE 186 L Pelee E 187 Le DEER 187 EE 187 Lemmer ein hele ed 187 EE RESTOR EE 187 EE 187 L Result Summary SOUP oisiciccersssnccseisavasacssncssnsdancasdsnonsbidnasedantbenadensansassicnnsans 188 ie EE 189 d EEN 189 e EE 189 LiMeas To Ref ara tha ache database imental 190 L Meas E 190 184 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S MS TEE 190 GR EE 190 eh ET a CT 191 A EEN 191 vi EE 192 MW I ee 192 L COIR Unweighted EE 192 DOE WOO itaenea iarseshustadhdviieacuidnanndecanson 192 L A NN irnia iiaa 192 L DeemphasiS annriki e aiaiai 193 L ND inc obec ate erat 193 L All AF Filter Op 193 GE 194 L Dev per BAZ 194 L Reference Posltton 194 L CEET EE 194 L AF Coupling AC DC cecccccccsesesccssssssscssssessssssscssesessssssssssesesesesenens 194 L Deviation BEE nosh sans aaae iei a ea 195 ET EE 195 L Phase Unit Baden 195 L THD Unit de EEN 195 L Abs Dev Unit kHzid m 195 L Rel Dev Unit UB I99 195 Zwee Domain emgeet 196 Ce te d e EEN 196 EE 196 L Lengi TE 196 L Length AUO aa E aa aE 196 Geh ik EEN 196 EE 196 L Squelch Level 197
109. D CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit of the y axis The unit applies to all measurement windows Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Unit gt DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example CALC UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm CALC UNIT THD lt Mode gt Selects the unit for THD measurements Parameters lt Mode gt DB PCT RST DB Example CALC UNIT THD PCT Mode ADEMOD SFM 2 3 2 3 Other Referenced CALCulate Commands CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt AOFF This command all markers off including delta markers and marker measurement func tions Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt depends on mode irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 96 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 REESEN Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example CALC MARK AOFF Switches off all markers Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt This command queries the number of peaks that have been found during a peak search Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt m gt Selects the marker Return values lt NumberOfPeaks gt Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE 3 Searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1 CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of maxima found Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt
110. Default is None Remote command E SENSe FI SENSe FI Ea LTer lt n gt LTer lt n gt SENSe FI SF ES D S S LTer lt n gt LPASs STATe on page 147 LPASs FREQuency ABSolute on page 147 LPASs FREQuency RELative on page 148 NSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs STATe on page 232 ENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs FREQuency on page 233 Weighting AF Filter AM Opens the Weighting selection list to select the weighting AF filter None lt Weighting AF Filter AM Deactivates the weighting filter This is the default setting Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs STATe on page 146 CCITT Weighting AF Filter AM Switches on a CCITT P 53 weighting filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 20 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz For FM stereo K7S the filter is active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT on page 145 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCITt STATe on page 230 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 30 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 CCIR Unweighted Weighting AF Filter AM Switches on the CCIR unweighted filter which is the combination of
111. E 44 Preamp OMON cissi aaia aaa a a aA aa eea 44 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual 45 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto 45 El Atem OMO EE 45 ElAtien Mode Autos Man suini A ia EARRAN ee dee 46 PRETEEN SOE aicinn aaie a N See 46 Ref Level POSO E 46 Grid AD SIREN EE 46 MOUA NW EEN 47 WUE 50 O75 EE 47 Ref Level Opens an edit dialog box to enter the reference level in the current unit dBm dBpV etc The reference level is the maximum value the AD converter can handle without distortion of the measured value Signal levels above this value will not be measured correctly which is indicated by the IFOVL status display Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel on page 110 AF Range Only available for AM FM PM measurements see chapter 2 1 9 Measurement Result Display on page 20 For details refer to the AF Range softkey of the main menu see AF Range on page 32 Range Only available for RF measurements see chapter 2 1 9 Measurement Result Dis play on page 20 Opens a submenu to define the level display range Range Log 100 dB Range Sets the level display range to 100 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 112 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 100DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 109 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 42 R amp
112. E IN input connector on the rear panel Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 RF Power lt Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the measurement channel Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 208 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S This trigger mode is available with detector board 1307 9554 02 Rev 05 00 or higher It is not available for input from the R amp S Digital IO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 If RF Power trigger mode is selected and digital baseband input is activated the trigger mode is automatically switched to Free Run In RF Power trigger mode the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate frequency The detector threshold can be selected in a range between 50 dBm and 10 dBm at the input mixer The resulting trigger level at the RF input lies within the following range 24dBm RF Att lt Triggerlevel lt 5dBm RF Att max 30 dBm for Preamp OFF 40dBm RF Att lt Triggerlevel lt 11dBm RF Att max 30 dBm for Preamp ON with 500 MHz lt InputSignal lt 7 GHz Note If input values outside of this range occur e g for fullspan measurements the sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input values is displayed in the status bar Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger lt n gt
113. EAK on page 164 Diff Freq Distortion Opens a submenu to enable and configure difference frequency distortion measurement This function is only available for AF spectrum measurements Definition of the difference frequency distortion f1 and f2 represent the frequencies of two sine wave signals with the same level Their frequencies should preferably differ by 80 Hz The difference frequency distortion factors of 2nd and 3rd order dd2 dd3 are defined as follows U2 Sei ann DH on Ux fr fi 2 ER Unf 100 for percentage indication or daz 20 Ig EP for indication in dB day UX2 DU U2 2 fi fa 2 Ux f2 for percentage indication or EH Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 214 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S El Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S for indication in dB Diff Freq Distortion On Off Diff Freq Distortion Enables difference frequency distortion The results are displayed in the summary table with the function DiffDist 2 3 The markers are indicated as DFD2 DFD3 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion DFD STATe on page 223 Unit DB Diff Freq Distortion Sets the unit to percent or DB for differential frequency distortion Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion DD UNIT on page 223 Search Signals Diff Freq Distortion Starts the search of the signals required for the difference freque
114. EMod TYPE lt FilterType gt This command defines the type of demodulation filter to be used Parameters lt FilterType gt FLAT Standard flat demodulation filter GAUSs Gaussian filter for optimized settling behaviour RST FLAT Example BAND DEM TYPE GAUS Selects the Gaussian filter Mode ADEMOD SENSe FiLTer Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The SENSe FlLTer subsystem selects the filters to reduce the bandwidth of the demodu lated signal The selected filters are used for AM FM and PM demodulation in common Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 143 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 El Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Using the commands in the SENSe FILTer subsystem you can define filter settings for each window individually Note however that if the same modulation type is used in several windows the settings defined for that modulation are used in all the correspond ing windows Commands of the SENSe FILTer subsystem SENSe FILMersne AOF E eEEeEeEA RS ENEE EET E A EEA es 144 SENSe FILT eren gt AWEighted STATE iaaiiai 144 SEN Se PIR VC RE 145 ISGENGe li Tercns CC UNwWeioabtedlt STATel 145 SENSe Filler lt n CCIR WEIGhted S TAC geed REESEN ENNEN 145 IGENZGe li Tercns DEMhaslst GTATel rneosrrrsnrnrererororernnnnenene 146 SENSeJFIL Tersn DEMPhasis TCONStA Miinan iiia ESR EEN 146 SENSe JFILTersn gt HPASs
115. EUlNC on ADEMod AFReouencvl RE Guter 84 CAL Culate cnz MAbRkerEUNCHon ADEMod AM RE Gut 84 CAL Culate nz MAb kerEUlNGC on ADEMod CAbRbierl RE Guter 85 CAL Culate cnz MAbRkerEUNCHon ADEMod FERRort RE Gut 86 CAL Culate nz MAbRkerEUlNGC on ADEMod EMIRE Gutts 86 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult lt t gt CAL Culate nz MAb kerEUlNC on ADEMod GINad RE Guter 88 CAL Culate cnz MAbRkerEUNCHon ADEMod THD REGultetsg nen 88 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion DFD SEARchsignal ONCE 224 CAL Culate cnz MAbRkerEUNGCHonDEDUNIT nnee 223 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion DFD RESUIt lt m gt 2 eececceeeeseeeeeceteeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeeeecaeeeetenaeeeseeieeeeeeas 223 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion DFD STATe 223 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion IMD SEARchsignal ONCE ssesssesesiresssirsssisssriritsinststrnnerrrnsernrnssrnrnnt 225 CAL Culate cnz MAbRkerEUNCHon MD UNITA 224 CAL Culate cnz MAbRkerEUNCHon IMDIREGutemzl nennt 225 CAL Culate cnz MAbRkertUNGC onMDTSTATel 224 CAL Culate cnz MAbRkerEUNGC on GEM Channelfvpez RE Gubemzl resene 226 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion SFM RESult lt m gt 225 CALCulate lt n gt MARKersm gt AOF F insirri iaria riiui riadia adapa a iaaea aua ia adie di ade nikadana 96 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCionFPEakeANNTLABGTAT 92 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FEUNGCionFbEakeCOUNG 97 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE ecccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
116. Example ADJ LEV SENSe JADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous lt state gt Activates automatic scaling of the y axis Currently auto scaling is only available for AF measurements RF power and RF spectrum measurements are not affected by the auto scaling Parameters lt state gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SENS1 ADJ SCAL Y AUTO ON Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 142 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh 2 3 6 5 2 3 6 6 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Mode ADEMOD SFM SENSe BANDwidth Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 This subsystem controls the setting of the instruments filter bandwidths Both groups of commands BANDwidth and BWIDth perform the same functions SENSE IBANDWidth BWIDINI DEMOQ EE 143 RENSE een EE ee ba RO dE 143 SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod lt Bandwidth gt This command sets the bandwidth for analog demodulation Depending on the selected demodulation bandwidth the instrument selects the required sampling rate The available values of the demodulation bandwidths are determined by the sampling rates For details on the correlation between demodulation bandwidth and sampling rate refer to chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Parameters lt Bandwidth gt RST 5 MHz Example BAND DEM 1MHz Sets test bandwidth to 1 MHz Mode A F ADEMOD SENSe BANDwidth D
117. FEED XTIM SFM LEFT see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 e lt FM Stereo Channel Type gt Spectrum Selects the display of the channel signal in span gt 0 In contrast to normal spectrum analyzer operation the measured values are determined using FFT from the recor ded UO data set SCPI command CALC FEED XFR SFM lt ChannelType gt g CALC FEED XFR SFM LEFT see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Diagram header information For each diagram the header provides the following information Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 182 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S El Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S A Right 1AP Clrw Ref 0 00 Hz 1 Screen A B C D Channel type Trace color Trace number Detector Trace mode N OQ a FF pm DN Reference value Diagram footer information In addition to the used frequency and span information the diagram footer also indicates the used weighting filter if any in FM stereo mode Result Summary The result summary displays the results of the evaluation functions for all channels in a table D Result Summary Carrier Power dBm Carrier Freq 15 0 GHz Ref Deviation 54 305 kHz Cross Talk dB Result Mode Dev REl to Ref Clear 0 00 dB 1 0000 19 000 kHz Summaries that take up the entire width of the screen are displayed as tables if only half the screen width is
118. FM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCITt STATe on page 230 CCIR Unweighted Weighting AF Filter Left Switches on the CCIR unweighted filter which is the combination of the 20 Hz highpass and 23 kHz low pass filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 1 6 MHz For FM stereo K7S the filter is active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR UNWeighted STATe on page 145 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCIR UNWeighted STATe on page 230 CCIR Weighted Weighting AF Filter Left Switches on the CCIR weighted filter The weighting filter is active in the following demod ulation bandwidth range 100 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 0 MHz For FM stereo K7S the filter is active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe on page 145 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCIR WEIGhted STATe on page 230 A Weighted Weighting AF Filter Left Switches on the A weighted filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodu lation bandwidth range Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 192 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S 100 kHz lt demodul
119. FMSummary lt 1 6 gt XTIM PMSummary lt 1 6 gt XTIM SPECtrum XTIM SUMMary lt 1 6 gt XTIM RFPower TDOMain XTIM SPECtrum XTIM SUMMary lt 1 6 gt XFRequency SFM LEFT XFRequency SFM RIGHt XFRequency SFM MPX XFRequency SFM MONO XFRequency SFM STEReo XFRequency SFM RDS XFRequency SFM PILot XTIMe SFM LEFT XTIMe SFM RIGHt XTIMe SFM MPxX XTIMe SFM MONO XTIMe SFM STEReo XTIMe SFM RDS XTIMe SFM PILot XTIM AM RELative TDOMain Demodulated AM signal in time domain XTIM AM RELative AFSPectrum lt 1 6 gt AF spectrum of the demodulated AM signal XTIM AM ABSolute TDOMain RF signal in time domain RF power Same as XTIM RFPower XTIM RFPower TDOMain RF power of the signal RF signal in time domain XTIM FM TDOMain Demodulated FM signal in time domain XTIM FM AFSPectrum lt 1 6 gt AF spectrum of the demodulated FM signal XTIM PM TDOMain Demodulated PM signal in time domain XTIM PM AFSPectrum lt 1 6 gt AF spectrum of the demodulated PM signal XTIM AMSummary lt 1 6 gt ABSolute Result summary for RF signal XTIM AMSummary lt 1 6 gt RELative Result summary for demodulated AM signal XTIM FMSummary lt 1 6 gt Result summary for demodulated FM signal XTIM PMSummary lt 1 6 gt Result summary for demodulated PM signal XTIM SPECtrum Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 90 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Deg Remote Commands of the An
120. FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 177 MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST on page 175 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 73 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 2 12 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Decim Sep Marker Peak List Selects the decimal separator with floating point numerals for the ASCII Trace export to support evaluation programs e g MS Excel in different languages The values dec imal point and comma can be set Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 177 Marker Number Marker Peak List If enabled the determined peaks are indicated by their corresponding marker number in the trace display Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANN LAB STAT on page 92 Softkeys of the Input Output Menu The following table shows all softkeys available in the Input Output menu It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only avail able with a special option model or measurement mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description leit Re EE 74 TE E 75 KE Ne ue EE 75 Tracking General eca shanties venient anaes inte avin 75 Power e EE 75 Nees 75 External NIKET eieiei AER 75 E EEE EE 76 ee 76 GI dE EE 76 L Connected DeVie c cciscieccsccessscsessssesssscesstsiveessssessseststvsvevssecdesesnuutsevevsenesees 76 L Input
121. FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Bit LVDS pin GP3 SDATA4_P Reserve2 GP4 SDATAO_P Marker1 GP5 SDATA4_P Marker2 2 3 9 UNIT Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 UNIT ANGLe lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for angles e g for PM display The unit is defined globally for all windows Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Unit gt DEG RAD RST RAD Example UNIT ANGL DEG Mode ADEMOD SFM UNIT POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for power The unit is defined globally for all windows Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Unit gt DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Mode A ADEMOD SFM SPECM UNIT THD lt Mode gt Selects the unit for THD measurements Parameters lt Mode gt DB PCT RST DB Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 163 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 3 10 2 3 10 1 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example UNIT THD PCT Mode ADEMOD SFM Other Commands Referenced in this Manual CALCulate DELTamarker Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The CALCulate DELTamarker subsystem controls the delta marker functions of the instrument CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint
122. FSV B17 if available The information includes Device identification e Used port Maximum digital input output sample rates and maximum digital input output trans fer rates e Status of the connection protocol e Status of the PRBS descewing test Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 78 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Digital Baseband Info Digital IQ Input Connected Device SMU200A Serial Number 103634 Port Out Digital Input Sample Rate 100 MHz Max Digital Input Transfer Rate 100 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Passed Digital IQ Output Connected Device ExBox Serial Number 100064 Port IQ IN Max Digital Output Transfer Rate 110 MHz Connection Protocol Passed PRBS Test Descewing Done Close For details see Interface Status Information in Instrument Functions R amp S Digital 1 Q Interface Option R amp S FSV B17 in the description of the base unit Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 171 2 3 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 In this section all remote control commands specific to the Analog Demodulation option are described in detail The abbreviation ADEMOD stands for the Analog Demodulation operating mode For details on conventions used in this chapter refer to chapter 2 3 1 Notation on page 81 For further information on analy
123. FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult lt t gt lt Result gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt This command queries the results of FM modulation measurement Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt t gt 1 6 trace 1 2 3 4 50r6 Parameters lt Result gt The result of the selected measurement type is returned Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 86 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 a a ee MMM Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Query parameters lt MeasType gt PPEak MPEak MIDDle RMS PPEak Measurement with detector Pluspeak PK MPEak Measurement with detector MinusPeak PK MIDDle Averaging PK 2 RMS RMS measurement Example ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on the analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM TDOM see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on the FM result display CALC MARK FUNC ADEM FM PPE Queries the peak value Usage Query only Mode ADEMOD CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult lt t gt lt Result gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt This command queries the results of PM modulation measurement of analog demodu lation Suffix lt t gt 1 6 trace 1 2 3 4 50r6 lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt Result gt The result of the selected me
124. For details on the demodulation bandwidth range refer to Demod BW on page 29 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us RST 50 us Example FILT DEMP TCON 750us Selects the deemphasis for the demodulation bandwidth range from 800 Hz to 4 MHz with a time constant of 750 us Mode ADEMOD SENSe FlLTer lt n gt HPASs STATe lt State gt This command activates deactivates the selected high pass filter in the specified window For details on the high pass filter refer to High Pass on page 29 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 146 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT HPAS ON Activates the selected high pass filter Mode ADEMOD SENSe FlLTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency lt FilterType gt This command selects the high pass filter type in the specified window For details on filters refer to High Pass on page 29 For details about the demodulation bandwidth range refer to Demod BW on page 29 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt FilterType gt Range 50 to 300 RST 300Hz Default unit Hz Example FILT HPAS FREQ 300Hz Selects the high pass filter for the demodulation bandwidth range from 800 Hz to 16 MHz Mode ADEMOD SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs STATe lt State gt Th
125. If defined a reference level offset is also considered Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV IFP 30DBM TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel RFPower lt TriggerLevel gt This command defines the power level at the third intermediate frequency that must be exceeded to cause a trigger event Note that any RF attenuation or preamplification is considered when the trigger level is analyzed If defined a reference level offset is also considered Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 159 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 REENERT Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt TriggerLevel gt RST 20 dBm Example TRIG LEV RFP 30dBm TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel PM lt Level gt The command sets the level when PM modulated signals are used as trigger source For triggering with AF AM AMRelative FM and PM trigger sources to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Suffix n irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 1000 to 1000 RST 0 RAD Default unit RAD DEG Example TRIG LEV PM 1 2 RAD Sets the PM trigger threshold to 1 2 rad Mode ADEMOD TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence TIME RINTerval lt Interval gt This command sets the repetition interval for the time trigger source Suffix lt n gt ir
126. K7 K7S Contents 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 3 1 3 2 EE 5 Documentation Overvlew RER EEEEEEEE KEREN EEEEE KEREN 5 Conventions Used in the Documentation cceeeeceeseeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneneesneeesennesseeeens 7 How to Use the Help SyStem ccccccccseceneeeeseeceeeeenseceeeeeenseseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseenees 8 Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 sssseeceeeeeeeeeeeees 10 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 cccssssseeeeeeseseeeens 10 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 ccccccssssseeeeneeeeeeeneeeeeaees 24 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 cscsseeeeeees 79 FM Stereo Option RASESV KRIS ee KEEN 180 Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeee 180 Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S ccssececsseeeeeeee 219 List f COMMING FE 244 It TC E 250 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 3 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Preface Documentation Overview 1 Preface 1 1 Documentation Overview The user documentation for the R amp S FSV is divided as follows e Quick Start Guide e Operating Manuals for base unit and options e Service Manual e Online Help e Release Notes Quick Start Guide This manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form and in PDF format on the CD It provides the information needed to set up and
127. Ker FUNCtion ADEMod FM RESUuIt lt t gt 0 ee eceeeenteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 86 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod PM RESuIt lt t gt cee ceceeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeees 87 CAL Culate nzMAkertUNGC on ADEMod GINad RE Gultetzsig 88 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod THD RESult lt t gt ccccsccecceeceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 88 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RESult lt t gt This command queries the audio frequency with analog demodulation in the specified window If several demodulation modes are activated simultaneously e g with the SENSe J ADEMod FM TDOMain TYPE command the audio frequency of the display mode selected with CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 is returned Suffix lt n gt 1 window lt t gt 1 6 irrelevant Example ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM AM TDOM see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on AM result display DISP TRAC ON see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 109 Switches the trace on CALC MARK FUNC ADEM AFR Queries the audio frequency Usage Query only Mode ADEMOD CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESult lt t gt lt Result gt CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESult lt t gt lt MeasType gt This command queries the resul
128. M TDOMain TYPE on page 125 Oth erwise a query error will be generated ASCII Format FORMat ASCII or Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 for details see chapter 2 3 6 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 115 Default unit Hz ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 see SENSe ADEMod SET on page 134 Sets up demodulator parameters ADEM FM AVER MAXH MINH see SENSe ADEMod FM TDOMain TYPE on page 125 Selects FM results to be measured ADEM AM WRIT OFF OFF S A S elects AM results to be measured DEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 witches on demodulator INIT WAI Starts measurement and waits for sync FORM ASC see FORMat DATA on page 177 Selects output format DEM FM RES AVER ads FM average results M FM RES MAXH ds FM max hold results EM FM RES MINH eads FM min hold results DEM AM RES WRIT Reads current AM results ADEMOD e D e D GI gt gror 126 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 SENSe JADEMod FM AFSPectrum TYPE lt Type gt This command selects the AF spectrum result types of the FM demodulated signal to be measured simultaneously Parameters lt Type gt Example Mode RST OFF OFF OFF lt result type 1
129. M Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S This format can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel It is necessary to define as a separator for the data import Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point It is therefore possible to select between separators decimal point and comma using the Decim Sep softkey see Decim Sep on page 61 Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 177 MMEMory STORe lt n gt LIST on page 175 Decim Sep Marker Peak List Selects the decimal separator with floating point numerals for the ASCII Trace export to support evaluation programs e g MS Excel in different languages The values dec imal point and comma can be set Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 177 Marker Number Marker Peak List If enabled the determined peaks are indicated by their corresponding marker number in the trace display Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANN LAB STAT on page 92 Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S In this section all remote control commands specific to the FM Stereo option are descri bed in detail In addition to these all remote control commands described for the analog Demodulation option K7 are available as well see chapter 2 3 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R
130. MAXH MINH see SENSe ADEMod PM TDOMain TYPE on page 129 Selects the PM results to be measured ADEM AM WRIT OFF OFF S A S elects the AM results to be measured DEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 witches on the demodulator INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for termination FORM ASC see FORMat DATA on page 177 Selects the output format ADEM DM BEZ AVER Reads the PM average result data ADEM PM RES MAXH Reads the PM maxhold result data ADEM DM RES MINH Reads the PM minhold result data ADEM AM RES WRIT Reads the current AM result data Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod PM AFSPectrum TYPE lt Type gt This command selects the AF spectrum result types of the PM demodulated signal to be measured simultaneously Parameters lt Type gt RST OFF OFF OFF lt result type 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW for details see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 The result type AF spectrum of the PM demodulated signal can not be activated at the same time as AF spectrum of AM or FM demodulated signal Example ADEM PM AFSP AVER MAXH MINH Determines average maximum and minimum value simultane ously ADEM PM AFSP WRIT OFF OFF Determines only current measurement results ADEM PM AFSP OFF OFF OFF Switches calculation of AF spectrum off
131. MAXimum PEAK 2 0 008 164 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOINE X cccccccesceceeeeeseeseeeseeeeeees 164 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHontxedRbOnty 165 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNCHontixzedtGTATel nenene eoersre nenene 165 CAL Culate nz DEL TamarkercmzFUNGCHonbhOiselGTATel rererere nene 166 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO cccccccecceceeseseeeeceeeseeeees 166 CAL Culate lt n DEL Tamarker eme LINK aeriene A EE AEE EE 167 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz ME 167 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STAT ccccccceececneeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeceaesasaaenenneneenenens 167 CAL Culate lt n DEL FamarkersmeiTRACE eent Eeege eege savigeetecesisidchbesnceaeetheceee ads 168 GALGulat lt n gt DEL Tamarka sma X aroraa daanin ainia aa aaa ia a aaia 168 CAL Culate nz DEL Tamarkercmz SREL ative 168 CALC latesp Bag Eh EEN 169 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK This command moves the fixed reference marker to the peak power When measuring the phase noise the command defines a new reference point level for delta marker 2 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO MAX Sets the reference point level for delta markers to the peak of the selected trace Usage Event CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RP
132. NEN EES d eae 170 INPUL AT Tenuation AU EE asccevenizdecusandniivdewadienedndednarn e a evar ani eege ed 170 INPut COUPling Jl Tei Nl le Ne El 171 Jl Tel le RE e eene DEEG 172 INPut DIQ RANGe UPP6N amnia aada Adena atin aha Anais 172 Nur DiOhRANGel Uppert UNITA 173 I Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 245 R amp S FSV K7 K7S List of Commands INPUCDICO SRAM E VIS Ta MR EE INPUCEATT A e DEE Keele HK Jl elle En Le NEE eeeeesegeeeeeeeregeegeeE Egger EE eege SAS INSTrument NSELect Mode IN STpuent Eet gebuede eege dnd An adden cabo dew aie Qvale Ail MMEMory STOR lt Nn gt LIST ccecccceesecsceesececeeseceeeeseeceeaeeseecaeeeaecaeeeaecaeeeaesaeesaecaeesaecaeeeseseeeaeseeeeaeeeeseneeeaeeas MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe OUTPUUDI Oi nears amie te dint iis tonite A titted et tee ge eee OUTPUEIFESOURGE s csdecsces eege eieeeteeiergue cad cd tise E naar Gaede deeg ake OQUTPUETRIGG OR reniras abadi iieaeoe dE Eden e PhROBelD PAhRTnumber AAA 113 PROBE IR RE lun 113 PROBe SETup MODE PROB SETUP NAME vrste siene skaida dia saeta gege eia aoe ais bein 114 PROBe SETUP STAT 6 25 cstcsceteec aia apioa eieae r E ETa aa ae aaa aeai iesaka ee ae EEaren 114 PROBe STATS E 114 AHB NIE WE e RE 179 ENER RN ER 154 TRlGoernzlSEOuencel DBBbower HOL Doft TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLD TIME o scscescecssccessscccecczecctcoccccctesssatsvactsenseassvedosccusctsessecnsetscaserouserecseeeess TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IF Power HOL Dot T
133. Oint X lt Reference gt This command defines the horizontal position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the frequency reference for delta marker 2 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 164 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Reference gt Numeric value that defines the horizontal position of the reference For frequency domain measurements it is a frequency in Hz For time domain measurements it is a point in time in s RST Fixed reference OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHz Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed RPOint Y lt RefPointLevel gt This command defines the vertical position of the fixed delta marker reference point The coordinates of the reference may be anywhere in the diagram When measuring the phase noise the command defines the level reference for delta marker 2 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt RefPointLevel gt Numeric value that defines the vertical position of the reference The unit and value range is variable RST Fixed reference OFF Exampl
134. PM SOKEY orori hariata aa EENE LAENAS 63 polarity external trigger cceceeeeeeceeeseneeeeeeeeeeteeeees 64 211 trigger edge zg Positive Peak detector eecc eee eeeeseeeeeeeneeeeeeaaees 17 Preamplifier 322 44 201 ee EE 64 211 Probes AGVAN EE 76 Configuration Softkey ceececceeceeeseeneeeeeeeeetes 76 R R amp S Digital UO Interface BI 78 171 176 R amp S Support SOMKCY ET 77 RDS SOMKOY renon ea Meee ania 197 210 reference TIME WEE 70 213 Reference Deviation IES os A sete ee I A E E AE E AEAT 188 reference level Geet eege ege See anias 46 203 Reference level iiscicccccissescsseesestesstussecsosccrosencosssasieces 42 198 Reference Level Digital 1Q EE 77 reference point UC e 71 213 EE 71 213 P AK SGANCH saniaisia siae seri deeg 71 214 UME aan Ed NEE 71 213 Repetition interval TIME EE 65 212 resolution bandwidth analog demodulation cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 50 204 Result Display analog demodulation ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 20 EE 181 Result Summary Setup UE 188 RF softkey RF diagram K P AAE E Aven Aa Gactetist E T RF Power trigger 2 000sdscsscacsegee ite sceeeeetessctents RF Preamplifier B22 e RF Spectrum analog demodulation 0eeee eseese 21 RF Spectrum 7 sriain enenatis RF Time Domain analog demodulation RF Time Domain KE Right e EE 197 210 RMS VBW E 18 RMS G16 CIM aininn een aud aade 17
135. Peak RMS RMS SRMS RMS SQRT2 PPEak Positive peak NPEak Negative peak PAVerage Peak 2 QPEak Quasipeak CCIR SQPeak Quasipeak SQRT2 RST PAVerage Example SFM LEFT RSUM DET PPE Sets the detector for the left channel to positive peak Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary MODE lt Mode gt This command defines the result summary mode for the absolute and relative deviation It does not affect the trace mode Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt Mode gt WRITe AVERage PHOLd WRITe Clear Write Overwrite mode the summary is overwritten by each sweep AVERage The average is formed over several sweeps The number of sweeps is defined by the sweep count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 150 or SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt on page 152 PHOLd Peak hold The maximum values are determined over several sweeps and displayed The number of sweeps is defined by the sweep count see SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 150 or SENSe AVERage lt n gt COUNt on page 152 RST WRITe Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 235 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Example AVER COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 SFM LEFT RSUM MODE PHOL Sets the result summary mode fo
136. R amp S FSV K7 K7S Firmware Options Analog Demodulation and FM Stereo Operating Manual TL 1173 0666 02 06 EZ remen Test amp Measu Operating Manual This manual describes the following R amp S FSV options es R amp S FSV K7 1310 8103 02 e R amp S FSV K7S 1310 8126 02 This manual is applicable for the following analyzer models with firmware version 2 0 and higher e R amp S FSV 3 1307 9002K03 e R amp S FSV 7 1307 9002K07 e R amp S FSV 13 1307 9002K13 e R amp S FSV 30 1307 9002K30 e R amp S FSV 40 1307 9002K39 e R amp S FSV 40 1307 9002K40 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing 2013 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muhldorfstr 15 81671 Munchen Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet www rohde schwarz com Printed in Germany Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S FSV is abbreviated as R amp S FSV R amp S FSV
137. RIGger lt n gt SEQuence I FPower HYSTeresis TRlGoernzlZSEOuencel L EVel AM REI ative ee eee eee eens ecceeeeeaeeseeeeesaeseseeseaeesseessaeesseeeseaeenseeeggs TRlGoerznztStOuencelL EVel AMI APBGolutel 158 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVe B fower cece eceee cece cesses eeeeseaeeseaeeseaeeseeescaeesseessaeeseaeeesaeeseaeenags TRiGgersn gt SEQuence LEV Gli Mics cccsiscseccistesvisdusssacssecadeacsicanstescsteestanissccadsdeducnsoves BOESEN E TRIGger lt n gt ESEQuence LE Vel IF ROW is icscccsetscciccscteessecencsasanesscevescedsecroteescscsoattedeadveceastteassevedendtecretndsbe TRiGgersn gt SEQuSNEe LEVESlPMss coseeviencesserssesesncpnds Sencevieescencps cehesbecanwenbasiiea scene suabCesnsevenrepscencaneesieresheanes TRiGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel RFROWEN c ccccicscsscccsssccscctscsccscecsssecesatdescescnteedsdecouecnsoacesecasstsesseronterecstadees TRlGoerznzlZSEOuencelL EVel GEMET TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM MONO TRiGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM MPX csccsecnseresscsseressterseasescnsssesesenseenecensenseassnesneensensetsaesecesses TRIGger lt n SEQuence LEVel SFM PILOt iinis aka irii saiia TRlGoernzlZSEOuencelL EVel GEMRDS inakaa ViTa anainn iiaia TRlGoernzlSEOuencel L EVel GEMRIGH nnen TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM S PEREO cece cceceeeeeceneeceeeeneeseaeeseaessaeeseeessaeeseeeseeesseeseeeenges 239 TRiGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel VIDGO cccscsseseseersccceseeesssssseneseenenseasesneesso
138. RPO X MAX Parameters lt Time gt Example Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 0 s to measurement time RST Os ADEM DM BO 500us Sets the position where the phase to 0 rad setting to 500 us 133 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Usage SCPI confirmed Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod RLENgth This command returns the record length set up for the current analog demodulation measurement Example ADEM RLEN Returns the current record length Usage Query only Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod SET lt sample rate gt lt record length gt lt trigger source gt lt trigger slope gt lt offset samples gt lt of meas gt This command configures the analog demodulator of the instrument Parameters lt sample rate gt numeric value The frequency at which measurement values are taken from the A D converter and stored in UO memory Allowed range refer to Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset Note for FM stereo measurements K7S option the sample rate is always 500 kHz as the demodulation bandwidth is permanently set to 400 kHz Thus this parameter is ignored in this case RST 8 MHz lt record length gt Number of samples to be stored in UO memory Range 1 to 400001 with AF filter or AF trigger active 1 to 480001 with both AF filter and AF trigger deactive RST 501
139. RX Settings SOKOV Sees fic euni Eu R O tere A AES 77 S Sample detecto i cisss serves scnesseesesdenepascpacectetctteraeadedeesieeeenene 17 Sample rate Digital UO Interface remote control ee 173 BIG Ita EE 76 scaling UR 46 SCPI Conformity information ec eerren 81 220 Search Signals remote CONTIN eege nana neeesa nania 225 SOMKOY ee Dran eege Signal Source VQ Analyzer sisena iiseonan e nnne Eaa Remote control aie Si SEENEN softkey 0 1 RBW remote control 0 1 Span remote control 0 5 RBW remote control 0 5 Span remote control SCHERER EE Abs Dev Unit K7S remote control 242 243 AF Center analog demodulation 00 ee 40 AF Center remote control analog demodulation 117 AF Coupling AC DC KO 33 194 199 AF Coupling AC DC remote control analog demodula Lt Tu AF Filter Kiel AF Full Span analog demodulation AF Full Span remote control analog demodulation SE EE EE 118 AF Range KTS sinisnsienrsniirsie tisuo 32 194 199 AF Span Manua remote control analog demodulation Kee 118 AF Span Manual analog demodulation 41 AF Start analog demodulation eee 40 AF Start remote control analog demodulation 119 AF Stop analog demodulation eee 40 AF Stop remote control analog demodulation 119 All AF Filter OFF remote control analog demodulation EE 144 227 All Mar
140. S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Range Log 50 dB Range Sets the level display range to 50 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 112 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 50DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 109 Range Log 10 dB Range Sets the level display range to 10 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 112 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 10DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 109 Range Log 5 dB Range Sets the level display range to 5 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 112 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 5DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 109 Range Log 1 dB Range Sets the level display range to 1 dB Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 112 Display range DISP WIND TRAC Y 1DB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 109 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 43 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FS
141. S FSV specified in the data sheet This setting is useful for overview measurements If the RF spectrum display is active the full frequency range corresponds to the demod ulation bandwidth Remote command SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum SPAN ZOOM on page 138 AF Full Span AF Spectrum Sets the span to the maximum frequency range for the AF spectrum display The maxi mum frequency range corresponds to half the demodulation bandwidth Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF SPAN FULL on page 118 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu AMPT Key R amp S FSV K7 The following table shows all softkeys available in the Amplitude menu in Analog Demodulation mode AMPT key It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey descrip tion PRET LOVE E 42 PAT MRR acc is Sat es des dats ts tis Bat otic nes ch aed atic ee nae css EE E 42 TE E E EEN 42 L Range Log EE 42 El itis restenosis aaa aes 43 LRange Log TG EE 43 L Range Eeleren ege reechen Eechen 43 L Range Log eet eege 43 LRange Log Mantal E 44 ET A4 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 41 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 L Range CM Ee eegen 44 Uhina EE 44 L Phase Unit PBadiieg 44 L THD Unit TOBY E
142. STATe EENS ERENNERT ai ENEE 146 SENSE IFILTer n HPA SS FREQUENCY ee EE AEN 147 ISEblSehbit ferensctb eleesct cteh egeEeEeeN EeENEENE SEENEN RENE ENEE E 147 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency AbBGolutel iniiai aaa 147 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative cececceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeeeeeeeesaaaeaees 148 SENSe FILTer lt n gt AOFF This command switches all AF filters in the specified window off Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Example SENS FILT AOFF Usage Event Mode ADEMOD SFM SENSe FIlLTer lt n gt AWEighted STATe lt State gt This command activates deactivates the A weighting filter in the specified window For details on the A weighted filter see A Weighted on page 31 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT AWE ON Activates the A weighting filter Mode ADEMOD Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 144 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT lt State gt This command activates deactivates the CCITT CCITT P 53 weighting filter in the specified window For details on the CCITT filter see CCITT on page 30 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT CCIT ON Activates the CCITT weighting filter Mode ADEMOD SENSe FILTer lt n
143. Spectrum FM Config A FM Time Domain B FM Spectrum Add Predefined Display Config AM Opens an edit dialog box to enter a name for the current screen configuration The con figuration is then stored and added to the list Apply Predefined Display Config AM Applies the currently selected configuration from the list to the current display Remove lt Predefined Display Config AM Removes the currently selected configuration from the list Restore Predefined Display Config AM Restores the default display configurations Existing configurations with the default names are replaced Select Trace AM Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of the trace for which the data is to be displayed in the currently selected screen Only activated traces can be selected Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 28 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Dee Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Demod BW AM Opens an edit dialog box to enter the demodulation bandwidth of the analog demodula tion The demodulation bandwidth determines the sampling rate for recording the signal to be analyzed For details on the relation between demodulation bandwidth and sampling rate refer to chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 143 Meas Time AM Opens
144. Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD FREQ Outputs the frequencies of the temporary markers Query only 99 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 REENERT Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor This command queries the Q factor quality of n dB down measurements Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAIL Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD QFAC Queries the Q factor of the measured bandwidth CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESult This command queries the distance of the n dB down markers from each other To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt Distance gt The result depends on the span In case of frequency domain measurements the command returns the bandwidth between the two n dB down markers in Hz In case of time domain me
145. T Reads the current AF spectrum result data of the demodulated AM signal ads the EM AM D SE EE EE EE Usage Query only Mode ADEMOD Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 124 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 DEET Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation lt Bandwidth gt This command defines the demodulation bandwidth used for analog demodulation The required sampling rate is automatically set depending on the selected demodulation bandwidth The available demodulation bandwidths are determined by the existing sam pling rates For details on the relation between demodulation bandwidth and sampling rate refer to chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Parameters lt Bandwidth gt RST 5 MHz For details on the correlation of bandwidth and sample rate refer to chapter Instrument Functions section Analog Demodulation Option K7 chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Example ADEM BAND DEM 1MHz Sets the demodulation bandwidth to 1 MHz Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation TYPE lt FilterType gt This command defines the type of demodulation filter to be used Parameters lt FilterType gt FLAT Standard flat demodulation filter GAUSs Gaussia
146. Trace 6 Hides the selected trace Remote command DISP TRAC OFF see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 109 Detector Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Opens a submenu to select the detector manually or activate automatic selection If a detector was selected manually the MAN indicator is highlighted If AUTO is selected the detector is defined automatically depending on the selected trace mode Trace mode Detector Clear Write Auto Peak Max Hold Positive Peak Min Hold Negative Peak Average Sample Peak View Blank For details see chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Note In Analog Demod mode if AUTO is selected the Auto Peak detector is used regardless of the trace mode However if Noise or Phase Noise measurements are per formed in Analog Demod mode the Sample Detector is used Auto Select Detector Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the best detector for the selected trace and filter mode This is the default setting Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 57 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 El Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 For details see also chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Trace mode Detector Clear Write Auto Peak Average Sample Max Hold Max Peak Min Hold Min Peak Remote command SENSe WINDow
147. V K7 Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example SWE EGAT POL POS SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURCce lt Source gt This command selects the signal source for gated measurements If an IF power signal is used the gate is opened as soon as a signal at gt 20 dBm is detected within the IF path bandwidth 10 MHz For details see the Trigger Source on page 62 softkey Parameters lt Source gt EXTernal IFPower VIDeo RFPower PSEN RST IFPower Example SWE EGAT SOUR IFP Switches the gate source to IF power SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE lt Type gt This command sets the type of triggering by the external gate signal A delay between applying the gate signal and the start of recording measured values can be defined see SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff on page 150 Parameters lt Type gt LEVel EDGE LEVel The gate is level triggered After detection of the gate signal the gate remains open until the gate signal disappears The gate opening time cannot be defined with the command SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff Note Using gating with gate mode level and an IFP trigger see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 the holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and IQ mode measurements EDGE The gate is edge triggered After detection of the set gate signal edge
148. V K7 on page 65 To display help to a softkey press the HELP key and then the softkey for which you want to display help To close the help window press the ESC key For further information refer to chapter 1 3 How to Use the Help System on page 8 Further Information e chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 e chapter 3 1 1 Measurement Result Display FM Stereo on page 181 Measurement Result Display FM Giereo e 181 Softkeys of the FM Stereo Menu MEAS key KT 184 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu AMPT Key R amp S EM KE 198 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu BW Key R amp S ESVKO L 203 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu TRIG Key R amp S FSV K7S 0 cccceeecceeeeeeeeeneeeees 207 Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu MKR FUNC Key R amp S ESV Kee 212 Measurement Result Display FM Stereo In FM Stereo mode the measurement results can be displayed in up to 4 different screens windows plus an additional marker table if applicable Each screen shows either the measurement results as a diagram or the results of evaluation functions in a table Result Summary All displays are determined by the UO data set recorded for the measurement You can define the display configuration for up to 4 different screens at once using the Display Config on page 185 softkey Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 181 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instr
149. V K7 a a ae ee Se Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Range Log Manual Range Opens an edit dialog box to define the display range of a logarithmic level axis manually Remote command Logarithmic scaling DISP WIND TRAC Y SPAC LOG see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 112 Display range DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe on page 109 Range Linear Range Selects linear scaling for the level axis in The grid is divided into decadal sections Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in referenced to the voltage value at the position of marker 1 This is the default setting for linear scaling Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 112 Range Lin Unit Range Selects linear scaling in dB for the level display range i e the horizontal lines are labeled in dB Markers are displayed in the selected unit Unit softkey Delta markers are displayed in dB referenced to the power value at the position of marker 1 Remote command DISP TRAC Y SPAC LDB see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 112 Unit Opens a submenu to define the unit of the measurement results Phase Unit Rad Deg Unit Sets the phase unit to rad or deg for displaying PM signals Remote command UNIT THD on page 163 THD Unit DB U
150. V K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 a a a a ee a E Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Zero Phase Reference Point PM Defines the position at which the phase of the PM demodulated signal is set to 0 rad The entry is made with respect to time In the default setting the first measured value is set to 0 rad This softkey is only available in the PM display with DC coupling Remote command SENSe ADEMod PM RPOint X on page 133 Phase Wrap On Off PM Activates deactivates the phase wrap On The phase will be displayed in the range 180 I For example if the phase exceeds 180 360 is subtracted from the phase value with the display thus showing gt 180 Off The phase will not be wrapped This softkey is available in the PM signal displays Remote command CALC FORM PHAS see CALCulate lt n gt FORMat on page 91 RF Power Selects RF power as the modulation type changes the signal display and opens a sub menu to set the measurement configuration In single sweep mode the data is determined from the current UO data set i e a change to a different type does not trigger a new measurement This menu is also displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key after changing the modulation type Remote command CALC FEED XTIM RFPower see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Display Config RF Power See Display Config on p
151. VARIL 114 Trace Mode Result Typ Senccccccicnccercarniocir dii arit er eed 115 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Fommat 115 SENSe ADEMod Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 ccccceeeeees 116 SENSe ADJust Gubevstem e eee e tenner etre eae e terse eeaaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeaas 141 SENSe BANDwidth Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 ce 143 SENSe FILTer Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S EGVKRI 143 SENSe FREQuency Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 05 148 SENSe SWEep Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S EGV RI 150 Other commands in the SENSe subevstem eee eeceeeeeeeeeete eter eeeetaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaas 152 TRACe Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S EGV kKIO 154 Commands of the TRACesubevstem eee eee ceeeeeeeeetteeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeiaaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeeaas 154 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Fommat 155 TRIGger Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S EGSVKO 156 UNIT Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 163 Other Commands Referenced in this Manual 164 CALCulate DELTamarker Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 164 INPut SUDSYSLOIN inur aaO A AE 170 MMEMOry SUDSYStOM iiic cseieeecesteedtceeasteindecesteaaledennapacgesetindeaesgsttaadegisantiaaeeedinteiaeties 175 OUTPut SUDSYSlOM sc iciccneeatensbteestaneivedesateiedidenateandedivesreiadedign
152. a teas eege a 16 57 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 255
153. a to the evaluation list of the AF spectrum diagram in screen B Usage SCPI confirmed Mode ADEMOD DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SSELect Queries the currently selected subwindow Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 107 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Return values lt Result gt Example Usage Mode Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 1 2 1 Diagram 2 Result list DISP WIND2 SUBW2 SEL Switches the focus area to the result list in screen B DISP WIND2 SSEL Result 2 Query only SCPI confirmed ADEMOD DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE lt Mode gt This command defines the type of display and the evaluation of the traces WRITE cor responds to the Clr Write mode of manual operation The trace is switched off BLANK in manual operation with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe The number of measurements for AVERage MAXHold and MINHold is defined with the S ENSe AVI ERage lt n gt COUNt or SENSe SWEep COUNt commands It should be noted that synchronization to the end of the indicated number of measurements is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix lt n gt lt t gt Parameters lt Mode gt Example Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix l
154. account for averaging maximum search Remote command INITiate lt n gt CONMeas on page 178 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 54 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 2 8 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Meas Time Opens an editor for entering the measurement time of the analog demodulation For details on the measurement time values refer to chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measure ment Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Note For FM Stereo measurements option K7S the minimum measurement time is 2 ms Remote command SENSe ADEMod MTIMe on page 129 Sweep Count Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of sweeps to be performed in the single sweep mode Values from 0 to 32767 are allowed If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed The sweep count is applied to all the traces in a diagram If the trace configurations Average Max Hold or Min Hold are set the sweep count value also determines the number of averaging or maximum search procedures In continuous sweep mode if sweep count 0 default averaging is performed over 10 sweeps For sweep count 1 no averaging maxhold or minhold operations are per formed Remote command SENSe SWEep COUNt on page 150 Sweep Points Opens an edit dialog box to enter the number of measured values to be collected during one sweep e Entry via rotary knob Inthe range from 101 to 1001 t
155. age 27 Select Trace RF Power See Select Trace on page 28 Demod BW lt RF Power See Demod BW on page 29 Meas Time RF Power See Meas Time on page 29 AF Filter RF Power See AF Filter on page 29 AF Range RF Power See AF Range on page 32 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 37 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Time Domain Zoom lt RF Power See Time Domain Zoom on page 34 Squelch RF Power See Squelch on page 35 Squelch Level RF Power See Squelch Level on page 35 Display Config See Display Config on page 27 2 2 2 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu FREQ Key R amp S FSV K7 The following table shows all softkeys available in the Frequency menu in Analog Demodulation mode FREQ key It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey descrip tion E LE 38 CP SUG EE 38 L 0 1 Span RF SOS CRU ege 39 L 0 1 Demod BW AF RF Time Domain AF Spechum 39 L 0 5 Span RF Spechum 39 L 0 5 Demod BW AF RF Time Domain AF Spechum 39 L EE 39 L x Demod BW AF RF Time Domain AF Spechum 39 UN ee 39 MRD EE 40 AF Center E A TEE 40 PAF SUA TEE 40 DA OD oo hore eto ade tessa thea nada cone ved Capeernceu dae dew teagan
156. alculated with a digital filter that returns stable results after a measurement time of 2 3 x 1 modulation frequency i e at least three cycles of the AF signal must be recorded before a stable AM can be shown 2 1 7 Detector Overview The measurement detector for the individual display modes can be selected directly by the user or set automatically by the R amp S FSV The detector activated for the specific trace is indicated in the corresponding trace display field by an abbreviation The detectors of the R amp S FSV are implemented as pure digital devices They collect signal power data within each measured point during a sweep The default number of sweep points is 691 The following detectors are available Table 2 1 Detector types Detector Indicator Function Auto Peak Ap Determines the maximum and the minimum value within a measurement point not available for SEM Positive Peak Pk Determines the maximum value within a measure ment point Negative Peak min peak Mi Determines the minimum value within a measurement point RMS Rm Determines the root mean square power within a measurement point Average Av Determines the linear average power within a mea surement point Sample Sa Selects the last value within a measurement point The result obtained from the selected detector within a measurement point is displayed as the power value at this measurement point All detectors work in parallel i
157. alog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 RF spectrum of the signal determined from the measured data via FFT XTIM SUMMary lt 1 6 gt Summary of all evaluation lists XFRequency SFM LEFT Left channel spectrum of FM stereo signal XFRequency SFM RIGHt Right channel spectrum of FM stereo signal XFRequency SFM MPX MPX channel spectrum of FM stereo signal XFRequency SFM MONO Mono channel spectrum of FM stereo signal XFRequency SFM STEReo Stereo channel spectrum of FM stereo signal XFRequency SFM RDS RDS channel spectrum of FM stereo signal XFRequency SFM PILot Pilot channel spectrum of FM stereo signal XTIMe SFM LEFT Left channel of FM stereo signal in time domain XTIMe SFM RIGHt Right channel of FM stereo signal in time domain XTIMe SFM MPX MPX channel of FM stereo signal in time domain XTIMe SFM MONO Mono channel of FM stereo signal in time domain XTIMe SFM STEReo Stereo channel of FM stereo signal in time domain XTIMe SFM RDS RDS channel of FM stereo signal in time domain XTIMe SFM PILot Pilot channel of FM stereo signal in time domain Example INST SEL ADEM see INSTrument SELect on page 113 Activates analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM Selects the display of the FM signal Usage SCPI confirmed Mode ADEMOD SFM CALCulate lt n gt FORMat lt Limitation gt This command activates the limitation to 180 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 91 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog De
158. amp S FSV K7 on page 79 For details on conventions used in this chapter refer to chapter 2 3 1 Notation on page 81 For further information on analyzer or basic settings commands refer to the correspond ing subsystem in the base unit description Subsystems for FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S lee DE 220 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Subsystem FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S 222 SENSE SUDSYSTSM oai akaa a etd dasa va EARCH REES 227 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 219 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S REESEN Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S 3 2 4 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt Gubesvstenm 228 3 2 5 TRIiGger Subsystem FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S ccccccecssecceesteeecessseeeeeesteeeeeeees 237 3 2 6 UNIT Subsystem FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S cccccccccsesecsssecceseeeecsseecesseeeseneeeeees 242 3 2 1 Notation In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed and then described in detail arranged according to the command subsystems The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard The SCPI conformity information is included in the indi vidual description of the commands Individual Description The individual description contains the complete notation of the command An example for each command the RST value and the SCPI information are included as well The options and operating modes for which a
159. an Mode ADEMOD Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 117 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 EE Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPIling lt Coupling gt This command selects the coupling of the AF path of the analyzer in the specified window Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt Coupling gt AC DC RST AC PM DC FM Example ADEM AF COUP DC Switches on DC coupling Mode ADEMOD SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF SPAN lt Span gt This command sets the span for AF spectrum result display The span is limited to half the measurement bandwidth of analog demodulation SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation on page 125 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt Span gt RST 2 5 MHz Example ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on the analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM AFSP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on AF spectrum result display of FM ADEM BAND 5 MHz see SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation on page 125 Sets the measurement bandwidth ADEM AF CENT 500kHz see SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF CENTer on page 117 ADEM AF SPAN 200 kHz Sets the AF span to 200 kHz Mode ADEMOD SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF SPAN FULL This command sets the maximum span for AF
160. an editor for entering the measurement time of the analog demodulation For details on the measurement time values refer to chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measure ment Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Note For FM Stereo measurements option K7S the minimum measurement time is 2 ms Remote command SENSe ADEMod MTIMe on page 129 AF Filter AM The bandwidth of the demodulated signal can be reduced by high pass or low pass filters and also a de emphasis can be switched on The selected filters are used for AM FM and PM demodulation in common Individual settings are not possible High Pass lt AF Filter AM Opens the High Pass selection list to switch on a high pass filter with the given limit to separate the DC component The filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 50 Hz and 300 Hz filters are designed as 2nd order Butterworth filter 12 dB octave The 20 Hz filter is designed as 3rd order Butterworth filter 18 dB octave None deactivates the AF high pass filter Default is None The high pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 20 Hz 100 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 1 6 MHz 50 Hz 200 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 300 Hz 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Note for FM stereo K7S all filters are active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs
161. and reads out the AF spectrum result data of the AM demodulated signal for the specified result type The data format of the output data is determined with the FOR Mat command see chapter 2 3 6 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 115 The output unit is dB logarithmic display or linear display Query parameters lt TraceMode gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW The specified trace mode must be one of those configured by SENSe ADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE on page 121 Otherwise a query error is generated For details on trace modes see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 Example DEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 ets the demodulator DEM FM AVER MAXH MINH elects the FM results to be measured EM AM REL WRIT OFF OFF S S Selects the AM results to be measured S b S A A A J J ADEM AM REL AFSP WRIT OFF OFF elects the AF spectrum results of the demodulated AM signal to e measured A DEM ON witches on the demodulator INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the termination FORM ASC cts the output format EM FM RES AVER eads the FM average result data DEM FM RES MAXH eads the FM Maxhold result data D R e F D R LD D D LI EM FM RES MINH M Minhold result data EL RES WRIT eads the current AM result data DEM AM REL AFSP RES WRI
162. andwidth lt 3 MHz The following table shows the required demodulation bandwidth for an error less than 0 5 dB up to a maximum AF frequency deemphasis 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us max AF frequency 25 kHz 12 kHz 8 kHz 800 Hz required demodulation bandwidth 2200 kHz 2100kHz 250 kHz 2 6 4 kHz For higher AF frequencies the demodulation bandwidth must be increased Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis STATe on page 146 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCONstant on page 146 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer DEMPhasis STATe on page 231 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer DEMPhasis TCONstant on page 231 All AF Filter Off AF Filter Disables all specified AF Filters Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt AOFF on page 144 Demod Filter By default a flat demodulation filter is used in Analog Demodulation mode However in order to optimize the settling behaviour of the filter a Gaussian filter can be used instead Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 53 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 2 7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 For details on sample rates measurement times and trigger offsets for various demod ulation bandwidths when using a Gaussian filter see chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Mea surement Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth DEMod
163. ary sinusoidal signals both logarithmic and linear averaging has the same results Lin Average Mode Activates linear averaging Linear averaging means that the power level values are con verted into linear units prior to averaging After the averaging the data is converted back into its original unit This softkey takes effect if the grid is set to a linear scale see Range Linear softkey Range Linear on page 44 In this case the averaging is done in two ways depending on the set unit see Unit softkey e The unit is set to either W or dBm the data is converted into W prior to averaging Le averaging is done in W e The unit is set to either V A dBmV dByuV dBuA or dBpW the data is converted into V prior to averaging i e averaging is done in V Remote command SENS AVER1 TYPE LIN see SENSe AVERage lt n gt TYPE on page 153 Log Average Mode Activates logarithmic averaging This averaging method only takes effect if the grid is set to a logarithmic scale Range softkey i e the unit of the data is dBm In this case the values are averaged in dBm Otherwise i e with linear scaling the behavior is the same as with linear aver aging see Lin softkey For further information on logarithmic scaling refer to the Aver age Mode softkey Remote command SENS AVER1 TYPE VID see SENSe AVERage lt n gt TYPE on page 153 Power Average Mode A
164. ase unit description To display help to a softkey press the HELP key and then the softkey for which you want to display help To close the help window press the ESC key For further information refer to chapter 1 3 How to Use the Help System on page 8 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation Menu R amp S EGVRI L 25 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu FREQ Key R amp S EGNMRI L 38 Softkeys of the Span Menu SPAN Key R amp S FSV K7 ce cececeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenteeeeeeeeaes 40 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu AMPT Key R amp S EONRI L 41 Softkeys of the Auto Set menu AUTO SET Key R amp S FSV K7 0 ee eeeeeeeeeeneee 47 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu BW Key R amp S EOVKIO 49 24 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 2 7 2 2 8 2 2 9 2 2 10 2 2 11 2 2 12 2 2 1 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu SWEEP Key R amp S EGVKRIL 54 Softkeys of the Trace Menu TRACE key R amp S FSV K7 ccccceceeeeeteeeeeettteeeeeees 55 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu TRIG Key R amp S FSV K7 cccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeteteeeeees 61 Softkeys of the Marker Menu MKR key R amp S FSV K7 ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeteees 65 Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu MKR FUNC Key R amp S FSV K7 0008 69 Softkeys of the Input Output Men 74 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation Menu R amp S FSV K7 The following table show
165. asurement type is returned Query parameters lt MeasType gt PPEak MPEak MIDDle RMS PPEak Measurement with detector Pluspeak PK MPEak Measurement with detector MinusPeak PK MIDDle Averaging PK 2 RMS RMS measurement Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 87 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on the analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM TDOM see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on the FM result display CALC MARK FUNC ADEM PM PPE Queries the peak value Usage Query only Mode ADEMOD CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod SINad RESult lt t gt This command queries the result of the SINAD measurement in the specified window Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt t gt 1 6 trace 1 2 3 4 50r6 Example ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM AFSP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on AF spectrum of FM CALC MARK FUNC ADEM SIN RES Queries SINAD value Usage Query only Mode ADEMOD CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod THD RESult lt t gt This command queries the result of the THD measurement in the specified window Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt t gt
166. asurements the command returns the pulse width between the two n dB down markers in seconds Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD RES Outputs the measured value Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe lt State gt This command turns the n dB Down marker function on and off Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 100 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 REESEN Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC NDBD STAT ON Switches on the N dB Down function CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME This command queries the position of the n dB down markers on the x axis when meas uring in the time domain To get a valid result you have to perform a complete measurement with synchronization to the end of the measurement before reading out the result This is only possible for single sweeps Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Return values lt Time gt lt time 1 gt absolute position in time of the n dB marker to the left of the ref erence marker in seconds lt time 2 gt absolute positi
167. atielisegniiedinndetteleidens 176 Other Command soises na a AE ARNAR 177 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 80 R amp S FSV K7 K7S 2 3 1 Notation Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 In the following sections all commands implemented in the instrument are first listed and then described in detail arranged according to the command subsystems The notation is adapted to the SCPI standard The SCPI conformity information is included in the indi vidual description of the commands Individual Description The individual description contains the complete notation of the command An example for each command the RST value and the SCPI information are included as well The options and operating modes for which a command can be used are indicated by the following abbreviations Abbreviation Description A spectrum analysis A F spectrum analysis span gt 0 only frequency mode A T spectrum analysis zero span only time mode ADEMOD analog demodulation option R amp S FSV K7 BT Bluetooth option R amp S FSV K8 CDMA CDMA 2000 base station measurements option R amp S FSV K82 EVDO 1xEV DO base station analysis option R amp S FSV K84 GSM GSM Edge measurements option R amp S FSV K10 IO IQ Analyzer mode OFDM WiMAX IEEE 802 16 OFDM measurements option R amp S FSV K93 OFDMA WiBro W
168. atio of the harmonics to the fundamental and harmonics All har monics inside the AF spectrum span are considered up to the tenth harmonic Zu THD aB 20 log e i l In addition the following general information for the input signal is provided e Carrier Power e Carrier Offset e Modulation Depth ASCII File Export Format The data of the file header consist of three columns each separated by a semicolon parameter name numeric value basic unit The data section starts with the keyword Trace lt n gt lt n gt number of stored trace followed by the measured data in one or several columns depending on measurement which are also separated by a semicolon File contents header and data section Description Type FSV Instrument model Version 1 50 Firmware version Date 01 Apr 2010 Date of data set storage Screen A Instrument mode Points per Symbol 4 Points per symbol x Axis Start 13 sym Start value of the x axis x Axis Stop 135 sym Stop value of the x axis Y axis reference value Ref value y axis 10 00 dBm Ref value position 100 Y axis reference position Trace 1 Trace number Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 23 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 2 2 4 2 2 5 2 2 6 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7
169. ation bandwidth lt 800 kHz Remote command S SF S M ENSe FILTer lt n gt AW ENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer AW Eighted STATe on page 144 Eighted STATe on page 229 Deemphasis lt AF Filter Left Opens the Deemphasis selection list to switch on a deemphasis with the given time constant The deemphasis is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range Note For FM stereo measurements K7S the demodulation bandwidth is always 400 kHz thus the deemphasis is always active 25 Us 25 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 40 MHz 50 Us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 75 Us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 750 us 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz The following table shows the required demodulation bandwidth for an error less than 0 5 dB up to a maximum AF frequency deemphasis 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us max AF frequency 25 kHz 12 kHz 8 kHz 800 Hz required demodulation bandwidth 2200 kHz 2100kHz 250 kHz 2 6 4 kHz For higher AF frequencies the demodulation bandwidth must be increased Remote command S ENSe FI ENSe FII M LTer lt n gt DI LTer lt n gt DI ENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FI ENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FI EMPhasis STATe on page 146 EMPhasis TCONstant on page 146 Ter DI iTer DI EMPhasis STATe on page 231
170. ays Dev per Division AF Range AM Opens an edit dialog box to set the modulation depth or the phase deviation R amp S FSV K7 only or frequency deviation per division AM display 0 0001 to 1000 FM display 1 Hz div to 100 MHz div PM display 0 0001 rad div to 1000 rad div The softkey is not available if logarithmic display is set Deviation Lin Log softkey Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous on page 110 Reference Position AF Range AM Determines the position of the reference line for the modulation depth or the phase devi ation R amp S FSV K7 only or frequency deviation on the y axis of the diagram By default this line is set to 0 The position is entered as a percentage of the diagram height with 100 corresponding to the upper diagram border The default setting is 50 diagram center for the display of the AM FM or PM signal and 100 upper diagram border for the AF spectrum display of the AM FM or PM signal Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 111 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 32 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Dee Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Reference Value AF Range AM Determines the modulation depth or the phase deviation R amp S FSV K7 only or the fre quency deviation at the reference line of the y a
171. ble in UO Analyzer mode For details see the base unit description Power Sensor For precise power measurement a power sensor can be connected to the instrument via the front panel USB connector or the rear panel power sensor option R amp S FSV B5 The Power Sensor Support firmware option R amp S FSV K9 provides the power mea surement functions for this test setup This softkey is only available if the R amp S FSV option Power Sensor R amp S FSV KQ is installed For details see the chapter Instrument Functions Power Sensor K9 in the base unit description This softkey is available for RF measurements Trigger Out Sets the Trigger Out port in the Additional Interfaces option R amp S FSV B5 only to low or high Thus you can trigger an additional device via the external trigger port for example Remote command OUTPut TRIGger on page 177 External Mixer Opens the submenu for the external mixer For details see the base unit description Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 75 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Probe Config With firmware R amp S FSV 1 61SP2 or newer active probes are supported via an adapter This softkey opens an edit dialog box to activate and configure a connected probe which is to provide an input signal It is only available if a probe is connected to the instrument s RF INPUT and USB connectors For deta
172. caling The labeling of the level lines refers to the absolute value of the reference level Absolute scaling is the default setting Rel Relative scaling The upper line of the grid is always at 0 dB The scaling is in dB whereas the reference level is always in the set unit for details on unit settings see the Unit softkey Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE on page 109 Input AC DC Toggles the RF input of the R amp S FSV between AC and DC coupling This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut COUPling on page 171 Input 50 9 75 Q Uses 50 Q or 75 Q as reference impedance for the measured levels Default setting is 50 Q The setting 75 Q should be selected if the 50 Q input impedance is transformed to a higher impedance using a 75 Q adapter of the RAZ type 25 Q in series to the input impedance of the instrument The correction value in this case is 1 76 dB 10 log 75 O 50 Q All levels specified in this Operating Manual refer to the default setting of the instrument 50 Q This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut IMPedance on page 174 Softkeys of the Auto Set menu AUTO SET Key R amp S FSV K7 The following table shows all softkeys available in the Auto Set menu It is possible that your instrument
173. combined in one measurement point accord ing to the method of the selected trace detector For details on detectors refer to chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 139 Start Time Domain Zoom lt Left Opens an edit dialog box to define the start time for the zoom area Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt on page 139 Length Manual Time Domain Zoom lt Left Opens an edit dialog box to define the length of the zoom area as a time value manually Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth on page 140 Length Auto Time Domain Zoom lt Left Automatically sets the length of the zoom area to the number of sweep points see Sweep Points on page 55 Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth MODE on page 140 Time per Division Left This function enables the Time Domain Zoom function and defines the zoom area length in one step The width of the zoom display is divided into 10 divisions thus by entering the time that is displayed in each division you indirectly define the zoom area length Time per Division 10 The starting point of the zoom area is determined automatically To specify the starting point manually use the Start function in the Time Domain Zoom submenu For details see Time Domain Zoom Squelch lt Left Activates the squelch function
174. corporated optionally in the command or omitted as well Q Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command either not at all once or several times Description of Parameters Due to the standardization the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions which are used in the tables of commands In the tables these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets lt gt and is briefly explained in the following For details see the chapter SCPI Command Structure in the base unit description I Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 221 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S 3 2 2 Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S lt Boolean gt This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states on and off The off state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0 the on state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 0 or 1 lt numeric_value gt lt num gt These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords character data The following keywords given below are per mitted e MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value e MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the
175. csavennsdansecedspeossneseastiepescns 35 196 Squelch Level SOPKCY 5 cascevsanrecsssdeesassessavteasdevasscdapesssneverseveseecns 35 197 Stereo e EE 197 210 supply voltage external noise source eee eee 75 sweep COUN AEAEE AT 55 Free EE 62 208 Sweep Continue single SWEEP ee cece eee eeeneeeeeeeeees 54 Ve 54 GU UE 54 Sweep menu analog demodulation 0 eee eeneeeeeeeeeeeees 54 T threshold VUNG A TA EEEE Ee 73 218 Time ET 64 210 Time per Division SOMM CY ege ge EES 196 Time trigger Repetition Internal 65 212 Trace Clear Write cccccccccccsceeeeeceeeeeeeseeeessessststeaaeea 15 56 Trace mode AVEA GE sere osissineticanneve contsicaniny tenntravresaewed a E EI ER Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold Vu trigger external zase sosioemosi enin GT Trigger HON EEN Hysteresis o edel dee eebe Trigger menu analog demodulation 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 61 teste gege See gege 207 trigger mode Etergal S etdegeeagteaaieedesgegs dee NEEE Free Run K IF ee Trigger mode RF ee TX Settings EX TQ BOX eiiie at Ra 77 U Upper case commands seeeeeieeeerrreeeererrreeeene 82 221 Upper Level Hysteresis SONKEY ernea ia ria a ENEE ENEE EE 49 V VBW RMS detector AAA 18 View trace mode cccccceceeeeeteeeceeeeneeeeteeteeeeesenaeees 16 57 W Weighting Analog demodulation 30 52 192 206 Z ZOOM E 69 AMPIE sn
176. cseeee eset diadeneneianaeeeceecataevesesateeeeeeseeas 238 TRiGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVekSFM STERGO icici iaiia iiias 239 TRlGoerznztGtOuencell EVel GEMRIDS A 239 TRiGger n gt SEQuence LEVelSEM PILOl c3 cictecercaisssaete ENER dee 239 TRiGger n gt SEQuence SOURCE niire aii aiaa tuveee anette 240 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM LEFT lt Level gt The command sets the level when the left stereo channel is used as trigger source Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 10 to 10 RST 0 Hz Default unit MHz Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 237 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S a M M Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Example TRIG LEV SFM LEFT 2Hz Sets the left stereo signal trigger threshold to 2 Hz Mode SFM TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM RIGHt lt Level gt The command sets the level when the right stereo channel is used as trigger source Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 10 to 10 RST 0 Hz Default unit MHz Example TRIG LEV SFM RIGH 2Hz Sets the trigger threshold of the right stereo signal to 2 Hz Mode SFM TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM MPX lt Level gt The command sets the level when the MPX stereo channel is used as trigger source Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 10 to 10 RST 0 Hz Default unit
177. ctivates linear power averaging The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to averaging After the averag ing the data is converted back into its original unit Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 60 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 2 9 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Unlike the linear mode the averaging is always done in W Remote command SENS AVER1 TYPE POW see SENSe AVERage lt n gt TYPE on page 153 ASCII Trace Export Opens the ASCII Trace Export Name dialog box and saves the active trace in ASCII format to the specified file and directory The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data section containing the trace data For details on an ASCIl file see chapter 2 1 10 ASCII File Export Format on page 23 This format can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel It is necessary to define as a separator for the data import Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point It is therefore possible to select between separators decimal point and comma using the Decim Sep softkey see Decim Sep on page 61 Remote command FORMat DEXPort DSEParator on page 177 MMEMory STORe lt n gt TRACe on page 176 Decim Sep Selects the decimal separator with floating point numerals for the AS
178. cy step size to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt CouplingType gt SPAN Couples the step size to the span Available for measurements in the frequency domain for RF spectrum result display RBW Couples the step size to the resolution bandwidth Available for measurements in the time domain for all result displays except RF spectrum OFF Decouples the step size manual input RST SPAN Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK SPAN SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FACTor lt Factor gt This command defines a step size factor if the center frequency step size is coupled to the span or the resolution bandwidth Parameters lt Factor gt Range 1 to 100 RST 10 Default unit PCT Example FREQ CENT STEP LINK FACT 20PCT Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 149 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 2 3 6 8 SENSe SWEep Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The SENSe SWEep subsystem controls the sweep parameters SENNENG 150 SENSe SWEep EGATeIHOL Dott iscicccrcisietede eh neiedencitlal esis SEENEN AEE ak 150 SENSE SWEen EGAT Oe E E 150 SENSE SWEep EGA TE SOUR O oo eEENENEENENRNEEEERENNNEEEEEER NEE NEEN ENEE ENNER 151 SENSe ISWEeDEGAT TYP EE 151 SENSe7SWEep POINIS 2 cccccsesccsaces SEELEN interna ive nae eel AEAEE 152 SENSe SWEep TIME csesesesesscscses
179. d DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous on page 110 Reference Position AF Range Determines the position of the reference line for the modulation depth or the phase devi ation R amp S FSV K7 only or frequency deviation on the y axis of the diagram By default this line is set to 0 The position is entered as a percentage of the diagram height with 100 corresponding to the upper diagram border The default setting is 50 diagram center for the display of the AM FM or PM signal and 100 upper diagram border for the AF spectrum display of the AM FM or PM signal Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 111 Reference Value AF Range Determines the modulation depth or the phase deviation R amp S FSV K7 only or the fre quency deviation at the reference line of the y axis The reference value is set separately for each display of the AM FM and PM signal and the AF spectrum of the AM FM and PM signal e AM FM PM signal display The trace display takes individual frequency phase offsets into account in contrast the AF Coupling AC DC softkey permits automatic correction by the average fre quency phase offset of the signal and can therefore not be activated simultaneously Possible values 0 and 10000 AM 0 and 10 MHz FM 0 and 10000 rad PM e AF spectrum display of the AM FM PM signal In the default setting the reference value define
180. de K7 Analog Demodulation KO Auto Set analog demodulaton Bandwidth analog demodulation See Eeer EE FM Stereo K7 scccc ccecinres NEEN ege deed Frequency analog demodulation 2 INPUT OUTPUE sic cccccssccceesicetssssensasecsdecasuseessesssnestiveenseces Marker analog demodulation ssssieee aeee Measurement K7 s Span analog demodulation ccseeeeeeeeeeeeeee Sweep analog demodulation siieee eseese Trigger analog demodulation Sec Trigger KTS iessesocessesazesssasecassaent danad Min Hold trace Mode ou eee eee ce eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees Mode Result Summary K7S cece cece eeeeeeeeeeeeneees 189 Mono SOKOV ugeet erte eege EE df ges 197 210 More Traces N n dB down Marker function ccccccececceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeesesnaeeeee 71 216 Negative Peak detector sssseesessesserernerensnansassenesncrndenenas 17 noise source external oo ccccccccccce cece cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 75 O offset reference level eege irinna rivini ian 46 203 Offset Dale Tee 211 Online help tee Alle KE 8 options Analog Demodulation 7 10 FM Stereo K7 ve Options OVER eebe ees RF Preamplifier B22 ae Overwrite e EE R amp S FSV K7 K7S Index P Peak List On Off SOKEY derrien a anaie aaa aE 72 217 Ph Noise Auto Peak Search FEMOLE CONFON sipsirin aksi 166 Pilo SOIMKCY EE 197 Pilot SONMKCY sristi dansana isisa aai pedrada 210
181. dth Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 0 ee 143 SENSe FILTer Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S EGVKRI 143 SENSe FREQuency Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 05 148 SENSe SWeEep Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 c eee 150 Other commands in the SENSe subevstem eee eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeenaas 152 Trace Mode Result Types The following result types can be set WRITe The current trace results will be obtained AVERage The trace results will be averaged over the given of measurements MAXHold The maximum trace result values will be obtained over the given of measurements MINHold The minimum trace result values will be obtained over the given of measurements VIEW The trace results are frozen and displayed i e they are not calculated for subsequent measurements Traces in this mode cannot be queried OFF The result type will not be used It is not possible to query trace data when result type VIEW is selected Each value besides OFF can only be assigned to one result type at a time If all result types are set to OFF the AM FM or PM demodulator will be deactivated Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format e ASCII Format FORMat ASCII The command reads out a list of comma separated values CSV of the measured values in floating point format e Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 The command
182. e CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 10dBm Sets the reference point level for delta markers to 10 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FlXed STATe lt State gt This command switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off Marker 1 is activated previously and a peak search is performed if necessary If marker 1 is activated its position becomes the reference point for the measurement The refer ence point can then be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X commands and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion F1IXed RPOint Y independently of the position of marker 1 and of a trace It applies to all delta markers as long as the function is active Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 165 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Deg Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example CALC DELT FUNC FIX ON Switches on the measurement with fixed reference value for all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise STATe lt State gt This command turns the phase no
183. e SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion on page 153 More Traces Opens a submenu to select one of the traces not currently displayed in the main menu Trace Wizard Opens the Trace Wizard dialog See chapter 2 1 3 Configuring Traces on page 13 Average Mode Opens a submenu to select the averaging method for the average trace mode The fol lowing methods are available Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 59 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Dee Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 e Lin e Log e Power Logarithmic averaging is recommended to display signals with a low signal to noise ratio While positive peak values are decreased in logarithmic averaging due to the character istics involved it is also true that negative peaks are increased relative to the average value If the distorted amplitude distribution is averaged a value is obtained that is smaller than the actual average value The difference is 2 5 dB This low average value is usually corrected in noise power measurements by a 2 5 dB factor Therefore the R amp S FSV offers the selection of linear averaging The trace data is converted to linear values prior to averaging then averaged and reconverted to logarith mic values After these conversions the data is displayed on the screen The average value is always correctly displayed irrespective of the signal characteristic In case of station
184. e lt State gt This command activates deactivates the CCIT CCIT P 53 weighting filter for the speci fied channel type For details on the CCIT filter see CCITT on page 30 Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SFM LEFT FILT CCIT STAT ON Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCIR UNWeighted STATe lt State gt This command activates deactivates the unweighted CCIR filter for the specified channel type For details on the unweighted CCIR filter see CCIR Unweighted on page 31 Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SFM LEFT FILT CCIR ON Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FiLTer CCIR WEIGhted STATe lt State gt This command activates deactivates the weighted CCIR filter for the specified channel type Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 230 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S For details on the weighted CCIR filter see CCIR Weighted on page 31 Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST
185. e synchronization to the end of the measure ment is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid after a single sweep end synchronization Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode DISP WIND TRAC MODE AVER Switches on trace averaging SWE COUN 20 Setting the sweep counter to 20 sweeps INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 20 sweeps Mode all SYSTem DISPlay UPDate lt State gt In remote control mode this command switches on or off the instrument display If switched on only the diagrams traces and display fields are displayed and updated The best performance is obtained if the display output is switched off during remote con trol Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SYST DISP UPD ON Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 179 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S A FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S The firmware option FM Stereo extends the Analog Demodulation option K7 to handle FM stereo signals The FM Stereo mode requires an instrument equipped with the cor responding optional software as well as the Analog Demodulation option K7 This section contains all information required for operation of an R amp S FSV equipped with Application Fi
186. e Measurement time Trigger offset width Min Max Min Max 5 MHz 8 MHz 125 ns 200 ms 200 ms 26 2144 s 3 MHz 4 MHz 250 ns 400 ms 400 ms 52 4288 s 1 6 MHz 2 MHz 500 ns 800 ms 800 ms 104 8576 s 800 kHz 1 MHz 1 us 1 6s 1 6s 209 7152 s 400 kHz 500 kHz 2 us 3 2s 3 2 s 419 4304 s 200 kHz 250 kHz 4 us 6 4s 6 4 s 838 8608 s 100 kHz 125 kHz 8 us 12 8 s 12 8 s 1677 7216 s 50 kHz 62 5 kHz 16 us 25 6 s 25 6 s 3355 4432 s 25 kHz 31 25 kHz 32 us 51 2s 51 2 s 6710 8864 s 12 5 kHz 15 625 kHz 64 us 102 4 s 102 4 s 13421 7728 s 6 4 kHz 7 8125 kHz 128 us 204 8 s 204 8 s 26843 5456 s 3 2 kHz 3 90625 kHz 256 us 409 6 s 409 6 s 53687 0912 s 1 6 kHz 1 953125 kHz 512 us 819 2 s 819 2 s 107374 1824 s 800 Hz 976 5625 Hz 1 024 ms 1638 4 s 1638 4 s 214748 3648 s 400 Hz 488 28125 Hz 2 048 ms 3276 8 s 3276 8 s 429496 7296 s 200 Hz 244 140625 Hz 4 096 ms 6553 6 s 6553 6 s 858993 4592 s 100 Hz 122 0703125 8 192 ms 13107 2 s 13107 2 s 1717986 918 s Hz 1 only available with option B160 2 only available with option B70 Table 2 3 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset using a Gaussian demodulation filter Demod band Sample rate Measurement time Trigger offset width Min Max Min Max 28 MHz 112 MHz 8 929 ns 14 28 ms 14 28 1 872457134 s 18 MHz 72 MHz 13 88 ns 22 22 ms 22 22 ms 2 912711097 s 10 MHz 40 MHz 25 ns 40 ms 40 ms 5 242879975 s 8 MHz 32 MHz 31 25 ns 50 ms 50 ms 6 553599969 s
187. e Sweep go 3 Single Sweep remote Control ssessee ceecee Sort Mode Freq Lyvl ccceccceeceeeeeeeeeeesneeees Squelch Ge Squelch remote control ccceeecsseeeeeeeeteeeeetees Squeleh Level seserapan State On Off e Sweep Count remote Control ceeseeeeeeeeees Time Domain Zoom K7 Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace Mode remote control Trg Gate Source remote control Trigger HOldOff v2 00 ccte sasccacguavenseeceeseaesentscceecs Trigger Hysteresis Tihigger Offset riestus aiken ake Migger E View Weighting AF Filter 0 eeeeeee R amp S FSV K7 K7S Index Softkeys AULOSElECE scnccsctsasecssscceasscveceetsssersgcsscevsstsbeectnsedesisvesseas Detector Auto Peak i Detector Average sssiisisiisiisizrdidsrdriiidii iniisa idesni Detector CISPR Average eeeereerererrreerrreerrree 59 Detector Manual Select Detector Negative Peak Detector Positive Peak Detector Quasi Peak op Detector RMS siisii ris Detector RMS Average eee cee eeeereeteeeeeee 59 Detector Sample sc SS Lower Level Hysteresis 2 0 0 0 rreeererrrresrrrrreees 49 Probe Configi sesser iisisti 76 Upper Level Hysteresis ccc ceneeeeeeeeeee 49 Span menu analog demodulation eee cette eeeeseeeeees 40 Special Characters A 82 221 Squelch Remote contra icicescsscnetssscdssseaetsescocoassecnseediseoanes 138 SOfKEY scsiscedsencecsssscessese
188. e ad A A aia ant 151 IENGel wWEenbOiNts AANEREN 152 SENSe SWEep TIME SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCTION ceccceceeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeaeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeesereeaeenteeeeeteeas 153 SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtiON AUTO eececeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeesereeaeeneesaeeeeeeaeeeaeenreeaeenteeas 153 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Index A Center UE e E 38 Characters Abs Dev Unit Special eguedgguegedt gdek eet d9E dee iiaia aiaa 82 221 SOMMCY EE 34 195 200 201 Clear Write trace mode ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeeees 15 56 Active probes Commands PCUVELING E 76 De SCriptiON edd nee den 81 220 AF Auto Scale ContinUOUS SWEEP sis sioisi aniariusi innia aiaiai aaia 54 SONKEY eer 49 Coupled AF CIAGIAM E 27 Result Summary Setup KE 189 193 KT E E 185 AF Full Span D EEN EE AF Spectrum analog demodulation a Demod Filter AF Time Domain analog demodulation 00008 21 GAUSSIAN E AF trigger K7 ccccscsccscsesesssscseseseseeseeseseseseseeecseseseneeeseeees 16 softkey All AF Filter Off demodulation bandwidth K7 SOKOV een 32 53 193 207 detector AM EUREN 17 softkey o eececcccccccscesccssscseesecaeseseceecsecsecsecseessassacsnesees 63 Detector Amplitude menu Auto Peak eegne degen ee 58 analog demodulation 0 ccccccccceecsecescssessesseeseesees 41 Autoselect EE 57 Average n c n 59 analog demodulation ccccccc
189. e gt This command activates the squelch function Le if the signal falls below a defined threshold see SENSe ADEMod SQUelch LEVel on page 138 the demodulated data is automatically set to 0 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DEM SQU ON Signals below the level threshold are squelched Usage SCPI confirmed Mode A ADEMOD SFM SENSe JADEMod SQuelch LEVel lt Threshold gt This command defines the level threshold below which the demodulated data is set to 0 if squelching is enabled see SENSe ADEMod SQUelch STATe on page 138 Parameters lt Threshold gt numeric value The absolute threshold level Range 150 dBm to 30 dBm RST 40 dBm Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 138 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example DEM SQU LEV 80 If the signal drops below 80 dBm the demodulated data is set to 0 Usage SCPI confirmed Mode ADEMOD SFM SENSe ADEMod SRATe This command returns the sample rate set up for the current analog demodulation mea surement Example ADEM SRAT Returns the current sample rate Usage Query only Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATe lt State gt The command enables or disables the zoom function for the analog demodulated mea surement data in the specified window Depending on the selected measurement time
190. e gt TIME SPECtrum BOTH NONE TIME Links the markers in all time domain diagrams SPECtrum Links the markers in all AF Spectrum displays BOTH Links the markers both in the time domain diagrams and in the AF Spectrum displays NONE Markers are not linked RST NONE Example CALC1 MARK1 LINK TIME Links the marker 1 in all time domain diagrams in screen A Mode ADEMOD CALCulate lt n gt THReshold lt Threshold gt This command defines a threshold value for the marker peak search A threshold line is automatically turned on Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Threshold gt The unit depends on CALCulate lt n gt UNIT POWer RST STATe to OFF Example CALC THR 82DBM Sets the threshold value to 82 dBm CALCulate lt n gt THReshold STATe lt State gt This command turns the threshold line for the marker peak search on and off Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC THR STAT ON Switches on the threshold line CALCulate lt n gt UNIT ANGLe lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for angles Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 95 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 REENERT Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The unit is defined globally for all windows Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Unit gt DEG RAD RST RAD Example CALC UNIT ANGL DEG Mode ADEMO
191. e reference level on the display grid When using a tracking generator only with option R amp S FSV B9 or B10 requires active normalization and in Bluetooth mode option R amp S FSV K8 this command defines the position of the reference value for all windows Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Position gt 0 PCT corresponds to the lower display border 100 corresponds to the upper display border Range 0 to 100 RST Spectrum mode 100 PCT with tracking generator or time display 50 PCT Default unit PCT Example DISP TRAC Y RPOS 50PCT DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue lt Value gt This command defines the reference value assigned to the reference position in the specified window Separate reference values are maintained for the various displays Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 111 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 0 PCT AM display 0 Hz FM display 0 rad PM display 100 PCT AF spectrum display of AM signal 250 kHz AF spectrum display of FM sig nal 10 rad AF spectrum display of PM signal Example DISP TRAC Y RVAL 0 Sets the value assigned to the reference position to 0 Hz analog demodulation DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t
192. e selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 108 Max Hold Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 108 Min Hold Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previously stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 108 Average lt Trace 1 Trace
193. ececceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesanaaaeaeeneees 225 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion IMD SEARchsignal ONCE ssssssessssssssseserererersrsrerenene 225 CAL Culate nzMAbkertUNCHon SEMI RE Gutemzfh 225 CAL Culate nzMAbkertUNCHon GEM Channelfvpez RE Gulteml eneee 226 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 222 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion DFD STATe lt State gt This command activates difference frequency distortion measurement in the specified window Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC DFD ON Mode SFM CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion DFD UNIT lt ResultUnit gt This command defines the unit for the difference frequency distortion measurement results Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt ResultUnit gt PCT DB RST PCT Example CALC MARK FUNC DFD UNIT DB Mode SFM CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion DFD RESult lt m gt This command queries the result of the difference frequency distortion measurement in the specified window Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt m gt 1 6 irrelevant Return values lt Result gt lt dd2 gt lt dd3 gt The difference frequency distortion factors of 2nd and 3rd order see Diff Freq Distortion on page 214 Example CALC MARK FUNC DFD RES Usage Query only
194. ects the display of the AF spectrum The AF spectrum can be calculated from the AM FM or PM signal in zero span SCPI command DISP WIND2 SEL Sets the focus on screen B CALC2 FEED XTIMe FM AFSPektrum2 see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Displays an AF spectrum diagram of the demodulated FM signal from trace 2 in screen B e RF Time Domain Selects the display of the RF power in zero span In contrast to normal analyzer operation the level values are the magnitude of the UO data set SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM RFP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 e RF Spectrum Selects the display of the RF signal in span gt 0 In contrast to normal spectrum ana lyzer operation the measured values are determined using FFT from the recorded I Q data set SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM SPECTRUM see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Diagram header information For each diagram the header provides the following information 1AP Clrw Ref 0 00 Hz DC 12 345 6 7 8 1 Screen A B C D 2 Modulation type 3 Trace color Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 21 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 d Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Trace number Detector 4 5 6 Trace mode 7 Reference value 8 AF coupling AC DC only in AF time domains if applicable Resu
195. ed for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block CALCulate Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The CALCulate subsystem contains commands for converting instrument data trans forming and carrying out corrections These functions are carried out subsequent to data acquisition i e following the SENSe subsystem CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV Wy SOOLE lacs dea nt caches N ee AE tie denen te ucla vee faa ssh ee 83 Other CALCulate commande 89 Other Referenced CALCulate Commande 96 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod subsystem contains the marker functions for the Analog Demodulation mode Commands of the CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod Subsystem CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod AFRequency RESult lt t gt ceeeeeeeeeeneeeeee eens 84 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod AM RESuIt lt t gt 00 eeeee cesses eeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeee trees 84 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESult lt t gt eee ceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 85 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod FERRor RESult lt t gt 0 eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eens 86 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 83 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 CALCulate lt n gt MAR
196. ee SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on the analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM SPEC see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on RF spectrum result display ADEM SPEC SPAN MAX 5 MHz Sets the max span to 5 MHz ADEM SPEC SPAN ZOOM 1 MHz Sets the displayed span to 1 MHz ADEMOD 137 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 SENSe JADEMod SPECtrum SPAN ZOOM lt FreqRange gt This command sets the frequency range for the RF spectrum result display determined from analog demodulation data The frequency range for result display is limited to the maximum span SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 137 or to the measurement bandwidth of analog demodulation SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation on page 125 Parameters lt FreqRange gt RST 5 MHz Example ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on the analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM SPEC see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on RF spectrum result display ADEM SPEC SPAN MAX 5 MHz see SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum SPAN MAXimum on page 137 Sets the maximum span to 5 MHz ADEM SPEC SPAN ZOOM 1 MHz Sets displayed span to 1 MHz Mode ADEMOD SENSe ADEMod SQuelch STATe lt Stat
197. eeecscsesesesevacsceeseeasavanssesecavansseveesavevaneseeseeesavaneveessees 152 SENSe SWEep COUNt lt NumberSweeps gt This command defines the number of sweeps started with single sweep which are used for calculating the average or maximum value If the values 0 or 1 are set one sweep is performed Parameters lt NumberSweeps gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 GSM 200 PHN 1 Example SWE COUN 64 Sets the number of sweeps to 64 INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for its end SENSe SWEep EGATe HOLDoff lt DelayTime gt This command defines the delay time between the external gate signal and the continu ation of the sweep Note Using gate mode level see SENSe SWEep EGATe TYPE on page 151 and an IFP trigger see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 the holdoff time for the IFP trigger is ignored for frequency sweep FFT sweep zero span and IQ mode measurements Parameters lt DelayTime gt Osto30s RST Os Example SWE EGAT HOLD 100us SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity lt Polarity gt This command determines the polarity of the external gate signal The setting applies both to the edge of an edge triggered signal and the level of a level triggered signal Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 150 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FS
198. eeeeeeeaeeeseneeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaee 93 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCionFbEake GOHT en CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtiIOn FPE KS X cccccecccceeeeeneeeeeceeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeeeecaeeeeseaeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeseneeeseeee 97 CAL Culate nz MAb ker mz FUNGCionFbEakeVd enn 98 CAL Culate cnz MAh ker mz EUNGCioncNDBown nann nnnannnn natnn nnn enn 98 CAlCulate nzMAbRker mzFEUNGCionNDPBDown FR Ouency 99 CAL Culate cnz MAbker mz EUNGCioncNDBDowpn OFAChor 100 SS re Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 244 R amp S FSV K7 K7S List of Commands CAL Culate cnz MAbker mz EUNGCioncNDBown RE Gu 100 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FUNGCioncNDBown GTATe 100 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME 101 CAL Culate cnz MAb ker mz FEUNGCionbPhN Otse aneneen nne nn 93 CAL Culate nz MAb ker mz FUNGCion bPhNOiseREGut 92 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtION ZOOM 00 ecccceececceeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeeeaeeeeceaeeeeseeaeeeeecaeeeeseaaeeesenaeeeeeeneeseneaee 94 CALCu latesn gt MARKer lt m gt LINK A 94 CAL CulatecnzMAbker mz PE SCurelon 101 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt TRACe AEEA EEAS EE nnn Ennn EEEa 102 CAL Culate cnz MAbkercmz 8 103 CAlLCulate cnzMAbRkercmz SX GLUIMmelEFT aaua kEi iE hakan ir i r Ee r aaia 103 CAL Culate cnz MAbker zmz XG lMmte bin 104 CAlLCulate cnzM AbkercmzX GL lMtslGTATel nnen 104 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SS Ze
199. eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeaaaeenes 111 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALUC cccce eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaeteeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaes 111 DiSblavlfWiNDow nzTR ACectsv BbACIng 112 DISPlay WSELSC EE 112 DISPlay MTABle lt DisplayMode gt This command turns the marker table on and off Parameters lt DisplayMode gt ON Marker table is displayed OFF Marker table is not displayed AUTO Marker table is only displayed if 2 or more markers are active RST AUTO Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 106 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example To activate the table display DISP MTAB ON To query the current state of the marker table display DISP MTAB DISPlay WINDow lt n gt STATe lt State gt This command activates the measurement specified window Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF Example DISP WIND2 STAT ON Displays a second window Screen B Usage SCPI confirmed Mode ADEMOD DISPlay WINDow lt n gt SUBWindow lt 1 2 gt SELect Moves the focus area to the selected window and subwindow Suffix lt n gt 1 window Example DISP WIND2 STAT ON Displays a second window Screen B CALC2 FEED XTIMe FM AFSPektruml1 Displays an AF spectrum diagram of the demodulated FM signal from trace 1 in screen B DISP WIND2 SEL Switches the focus are
200. ef Point Time zero span on page 71 and Peak Search on page 71 When set to ON all delta markers which previously referenced marker 1 are automatically set to reference the fixed marker The reference marker assignment can be changed using the Marker Wizard see Marker Wizard on page 66 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed STATe on page 165 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 70 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Ref Point Level Ref Fixed Opens an edit dialog box to enter a reference level value All relative level values of the delta markers refer to this reference level Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y on page 165 Ref Point Frequency span gt 0 Ref Point Time zero span Ref Fixed Opens an edit dialog box to enter a frequency reference or time value All relative fre quency or time values of the delta markers refer to this frequency reference For phase noise measurement input of reference time is not possible Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X on page 164 Peak Search Ref Fixed Sets the maximum value of the selected trace as the reference point Remote command CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIlXed RPOint MAXimum PEAK on page 164 n dB down
201. efer to chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measure ment Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Note For FM Stereo measurements option K7S the minimum measurement time is 2 ms Remote command SENSe ADEMod MTIMe on page 129 AF Filter The bandwidth of the demodulated signal can be reduced by high pass or low pass filters and also a de emphasis can be switched on The selected filters are used for AM FM and PM demodulation in common Individual settings are not possible High Pass lt AF Filter Opens the High Pass selection list to switch on a high pass filter with the given limit to separate the DC component The filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 50 Hz and 300 Hz filters are designed as 2nd order Butterworth filter 12 dB octave The 20 Hz filter is designed as 3rd order Butterworth filter 18 dB octave None deactivates the AF high pass filter Default is None The high pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 204 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S 20 Hz 100 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 1 6 MHz 50 Hz 200 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 300 Hz 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Note for FM stereo K7S all filters are active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command
202. eft stereo channel Usage Query only Mode SFM SENSe Subsystem The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the stereo FM demodulator In accordance with the SCPI standard the keyword SENSe is optional for this reason which means that it is not necessary to include the SENSe node in command sequences SENSGISEM ET 227 SENSE SFM STATO a a aT Ea T E A DEN ERE NEEESE 227 SENSE J SFM Eege anii ai aea dann eaaa ACEN EE 228 SENSe SFM FILTer lt n gt AOFF This command switches all AF filters off Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Example SENS SFM FILT AOFF Usage Event Mode SFM SENSe SFM STATe lt State gt This command switches between Stereo FM and Spectrum mode Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SFM STAT ON Mode SFM Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 227 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S 3 2 4 Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S SENSe SFM REFerence lt Level gt This command defines the reference deviation required for relative deviation measure ments Alternatively it can be defined automatically see e g SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary REFerence AUTO ONCE on page 236 Parameters lt Level gt lt numeric value gt in Hz or dBm RST 10 0 dBm Example SFM REF 2Hz Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt Subsystem The SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt subsystem contains
203. emodulation 0eeeee 41 Full Span remote control K7 Gate Delay remote control ceeceeeeeeeeeeeeteees Gated Trigger remote control csseeeeeeeeees Gate Mode Lvl Edge remote control sie Grid EE Grid Abs Rel remote control 0 eee High Pass AF Filter analog demodulation 29 50 190 204 High Pass AF Filter remote control analog demodula ul EE 146 147 IF Output IF Video remote control 0 175 IP IPOWGEP EE Input 50 W 75 W remote control Left CIMT criin cease discs eaii Left Limit remote Control cccceceeeeeeeeeeeteeees Length Auto RE sengeeeeeersgesdEAEEeEdE deen Length Auto remote control analog demodulation Length Manual ki 34 196 Length Manual remote control analog demodulation Limits On Off remote control Se Dn BE Link AF Spectrum Marker c cceceeeeeeeeeseeeeteeee Link AF Spectrum Marker remote control a Link Mkr1 and Delta o eee reece eeeeee Link Mrk1 and Delta1 remote control Link Time Marker 0 0 ccceeeee ee eeeeeeeeeee x Link Time Marker remote control ieee seeen Low Pass AF Filter remote control analog demodulation E 147 148 233 234 Manual remote control cccceecceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees Marker 1 Marker 2 16 Marker 1 remote Control 0 ccceeseeeeeeeeteeeteeeees Marker En E Marker 1 to 4
204. emote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt Source gt IMMediate Free Run EXTern External trigger IFPower Power trigger at the second intermediate frequency TIME Time interval GPO GP1 GP2 GP3 GP4 GP5 For UO Analyzer or AnalogDemod mode only Defines triggering of the measurement directly via the LVDS con nector The parameter specifies which general purpose bit 0 to 5 will provide the trigger data This trigger mode is available for input from the R amp S Digital UC Interface option R amp S FSV B17 only The assignment of the general purpose bits used by the Digital IQ trigger to the LVDS connector pins is provided in table 2 5 viDeo Video mode is only available in the time domain and only in Spec trum mode BBPower Baseband power for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 PSEN External power sensor requires R amp S FSV K9 option AF AF power signal FM FM power signal AM corresponds to the RF power signal AMRelative corresponds to the AM signal PM PM power signal RST IMMediate Example TRIG SOUR EXT Selects the external trigger input as source of the trigger signal Table 2 5 Assignment of general purpose bits to LVDS connector pins Bit LVDS pin GPO SDATA4_P Trigger1 GP1 SDATA4_P Trigger2 GP2 SDATAO_P Reserve Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 162 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S
205. en Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys e To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHZ In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 174 El Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the electronic attenu ator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 202 R amp
206. eneeeeeees 47 74 203 Input AC DC remote control 00 eee 171 Input GO DU ZB siccisscscscceeesscctessisseeeestccseosaeessseess 47 203 LOG sai feeseeiiecsdes fois eee erger Deeg eeegeg 60 Low Pass AF Filter analog demodulation 29 51 191 205 Marker 1 to 4 remote control 0 0 105 169 Marker Number eee eee eee cess eeneeteeeenees 74 219 Marker Number remote control sssssiseeeseseeeesee 92 Marker Peak List Marker to Trace Marker to Trace remote control 2 ee 102 Marker Zoom Max Hl WEE Max Peak Count cccccccceceeceeteseeeeeeseeeeeetees May Peak Size remote control Meas Time analog demodulation Mech Atten Auto eee ee ce eee e renee eeneeeeeee Mech Atten Auto remote control 0 cceeeeeeees Mech Atten Manual s es eeeeeeeeeeeeees Mech Atten Manual remote control Mim Hold iiitr Peak List On Off viccccsscscsscesescsssossevscstessseverideaceee Preamp On Off e Preamp On Off remote control ee Ref Level E Ref Level remote control RF Atten AUTO cicccccccccicccceccnietecddatenseneessscanietsevese RF Atten Auto remote control ccseeeeeeeeees RF Atten Manual de RF Atten Manual remote control 10ss aeee RF ET Save remote control Select 1 2 3 4 remote control 0 cere Single Meas remote control c ceeeeeeeeeeeeeees Singl
207. ensenseesceene 118 SENSe JADEModsn gt AF SPAN eriin aa nln icine stein eh ated iit end TATR 118 SENS6 ADEModsn gt AF SPAN FULL AAA 118 ISENS JADEMod lt H gt AF STARU eiranud arannana aaaea AA Aaaa aaa aa TAT aAa ENE aan Aaaa 119 SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF ST OP i ccnenctenndeeieeaeaceiinn tpaaeaeipeae acide dree ed 119 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGIHD cece eee e cence cece eee eeaeeseaeeseaeeseeeseeseaeeseaeessaeeseeseeeseseeseeeseaees 140 IEN Ge JADEMod nz Z0OOMLENGUMODE ttti ntEntEntintnninninnnnnerntrnerae nae 140 SENSe JADEMod lt n gt ZOOMISTARL ee cece cent sense ceeeseaeeceaecseeeeseeseeesseeseaeeseaeeesaeeseeeseeeseneeseeesenees SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATe SENSe JADEMOd STA We kiaka geesde Cedies SENSE JADJUStALL diirit irai ra aAa ENE AERA EE ETARE TENETE EAE E Ri N EER IGENZGe IAD Just COhNFouratonHvGTeressl Oe 141 IGENZGe IADJustCOhNFourationHvGTeress Ufer 141 SENSe ADJust CONFigure LEVel DURAtion 0 eee cece eeneceenee sees eeeaeeeeseessaeeseaeeseaeessaeeseeeeseeeeseeeeenees 142 Se eee ee Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 247 R amp S FSV K7 K7S List of Commands SENSE JADJUSt DEEN a ege eege ged 142 SENS6 ADJ St EN estate Edge Ed E AAR N 142 IEN Ge IAD lust SCAL ev AUTOtCONTInuousl 142 EIST ee TE 152 IGENGe JAVERage nz TE 153 EISE CR tee E NG an d TEE 143 IEN Ge IGANDwicdtblGwlDtb DEMod 143 SENSE FIL Ters nA AOF i e cities caer ateei een nen pa a
208. ent time of the analog demodulation For details on the measurement time values refer to chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measure ment Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Note For FM Stereo measurements option K7S the minimum measurement time is 2 ms Remote command SENSe ADEMod MTIMe on page 129 AF Filter Left Opens a dialog to select the appropriate filters The bandwidth of the demodulated signal can be reduced by high pass or low pass filters and also a weighting or de emphasis can be switched on You can define different filter settings for each channel xl AF Filter Setup High Pass Low pass Weighting Deemphasis Coupled ws one in nee ne Right None gt None s coiRunweighted 75us zl Mono None gt None corr unweigntea 75us zl Pilot High Pass lt AF Filter Left Opens the High Pass selection list to switch on a high pass filter with the given limit to separate the DC component The filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 50 Hz and 300 Hz filters are designed as 2nd order Butterworth filter 12 dB octave The 20 Hz filter is designed as 3rd order Butterworth filter 18 dB octave None deactivates the AF high pass filter Default is None The high pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 190 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S
209. equencies span lt gt 0 or time span 0 of the maxima found 107 5E6 153 8E6 187 9E6 frequencies in increasing order 2 05E 3 2 37E 3 3 71le 3 times in increasing order CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks Y This command queries the position of the peaks on the y axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT on page 97 The number of peaks on the number that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Return values lt PeakPosition gt Example Usage Selects the measurement window Selects the marker Position of the peaks on the y axis The unit depends on the mea surement CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y 8 Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values CALC MARK FUNC FPE 3 Searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1 CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of maxima found CALC MARK FUNC FPE Y Queries the levels of the maxima found Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown lt Distance gt This command defines the distance of the n dB down markers to the reference marker Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 98 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp
210. er DEMPhasis TCONstant 231 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer HPASs FREQUENCY ecceeceeeceeceeeeseeeeeeeeseseeseaeeseaeeeseeteeeseeees 232 IGENZGe ISGEM Channelfvpe Hl TerHbpA eGTATe 232 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs FREQUENCY 0 0 e cece cee eeeeeeeeeeseeseaeeeeaeetsaeseaeeseaeeteaeenaees 233 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs FREQuency RELative cece ceeeeeneeeeneeteeeeeeeneeees 234 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs FREQuency ABSolute 00 cc ee eee eeeeseseeeeneeseeeeeeees 233 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FlLTer LPASs STATe IGENGe GEM Channelfvpez HRGlUlMmanv COUlblmg nnt IGENZGe IGEM ChannelTvpezRGUlMmarv DE Techort FUN Honn 234 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary MODE ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeseeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeceeeseeeeeees 235 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary REFerence AUTO ONCE eeeeseceseeeneeeneeeeneetseeennees 236 IGENGe GEM Channelfvpez TDOmain RE Gu 236 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt TDOmain TYPE SENSe SFMiFIL Ter sn AOF Py ec iets terion tennis diiron aleve Sten einen SENSe SEM REF SIGN Ces idee ebe EES inetd EE AER EE a a dda EIST ER RRE SENSEG ISWEep COUNE EE TEE Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 248 IENGel wWEenEGATeHOL Doft 150 EISEN ENEE 150 SENSe SWEep EGAT e SOURGCE erg iiyaa ainiaan abani naaa a aaa aa Aa E da aaa NaN 151 SENS SWEep EGAT 6 T PEs iienaa emer dadda iad
211. er the average cal culation is active or not The number of measurements applies to all traces in the window Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt NoMeasurements gt 0 to 32767 RST 0 Example SWE CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode AVER COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 AVER STAT ON Switches on the calculation of average INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 152 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 REENERT Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 SENSe JAVERage lt n gt TYPE lt FunctionType gt This command selects the type of average function Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Parameters lt FunctionType gt ViDeo LINear POWer viDeo The logarithmic power values are averaged LiNear The power values are averaged before they are converted to log arithmic values POWer The power level values are converted into unit Watt prior to aver aging After the averaging the data is converted back into its orig inal unit RST VIDeo Example AVER TYPE LIN Switches to linear average calculation SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion lt Function gt This command selects the detector for the data acquisition in the selected trace Suffix lt trace gt 1 6 Selects the trace lt trace
212. ers lt Mode gt AUTO MAN RST AUTO Example ADEM ZOOM LENG MODE MAN Zoom function uses the length defined manually Mode ADEMOD 2 3 6 4 SENSe ADJust Subsystem The ADJust subsystem controls automatic definition of frequency and level settings SEN Se ADJS BE 141 IGENGelAD lust CONEiouratton HvGTereslsLOWer 141 SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPEV cccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeteeeeeeeeeeaaaeeees 141 SENSe JADJust CONFigure LEVel DU Patton c ccccoccecntsnecaceeeseeeseecednnaceeceateaeenecnetenses 142 Ee TEE 142 SENSeJADUUSHM EVEL 2 ege deeg gneEeeeek Eege ESO tate EE ca NEE Ae 142 IGENZGelADlust SCAL ev AUTTOtCONTinuousl 142 SENSe JADJust ALL This command determines the ideal frequency and level configuration for the current measurement Example ADJ ALL SENSe JADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer lt Threshold gt This command defines a lower threshold the signal must drop below before the reference level is automatically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed For more information see SENSe ADJust LEVel1 Parameters lt Threshold gt Range 0 to 200 RST 1dB Default unit dB Example SENS ADJ CONF HYST LOW 2 Example For an input signal level of currently 20 dBm the reference level will only be adjusted when the signal level falls below 18 dBm SENSe JADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer lt Threshold gt This command defines an upper threshold
213. ers The 3 kHz 15 kHz 23 kHz and 150 kHz softkeys switch on a absolute low pass filter The filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 3 kHz 15 kHz and 23 kHz filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filters 30 dB octave The 150 kHz filter is designed as 8th order Butterworth filter 48 dB octave The absolute low pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 3 kHz 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 15 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz 23 kHz 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 150 kHz 400 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Note for FM stereo K7S all filters are active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz e Relative low pass filters The filters 3 dB can be selected in of the demodulation bandwidth The filters are designed as 5th order Butterworth filter 30 dB octave and active for all demodulation bandwidths e None deactivates the AF low pass filter Default is None Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs STATe on page 147 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency ABSolute on page 147 SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative on page 148 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs STATe on page 232 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs FREQuency on page 233 Weighting AF Filter Opens the Weighting select
214. f the keywords is used Example SENSe FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the fre quency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz SENSe FREQuency CW 1E3 SENSe FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Selection of the parameters for the command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage lt 1 4 gt TYPE VIDeo LiINear 0 Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can be incorporated optionally in the command or omitted as well Q Parameters in braces can be incorporated optionally in the command either not at all once or several times Description of Parameters Due to the standardization the parameter section of SCPI commands consists always of the same syntactical elements SCPI has therefore specified a series of definitions which are used in the tables of commands In the tables these established definitions are indicated in angled brackets lt gt and is briefly explained in the following For details see the chapter SCPI Command Structure in the base unit description lt Bo
215. ffset on page 18 Remote command SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary DETector FUNCtion on page 234 Mode Result Summary Setup lt Left Defines the result summary mode for the absolute deviation and the deviation relative to the reference Clear Write Overwrite mode the summary is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting Peak Hold The peak values are determined over several sweeps and displayed Average The average is formed over several sweeps Remote command SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary MODE on page 235 Coupled Result Summary Setup lt Left All channels for which this option is enabled are configured identically i e the channel settings are coupled If you change the settings for one coupled channel the settings are changed for all other coupled channels as well The settings are taken from the first channel for which coupling is enabled Remote command SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary COUPling on page 234 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 189 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S EE Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Meas To Ref Result Summary Setup lt Left Determines the Reference Deviation from the current channel measurement Remote command SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary REFerence AUTO ONCE on page 236 Meas Time lt Left Opens an editor for entering the measurem
216. fine a repetition interval in which the measurement is triggered The shortest interval is 2 ms Remote command TRIG SOUR TIMETRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 Trigger Level Defines the trigger level as a numeric value In the trigger mode Time this softkey is not available Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel IFPower on page 159 For digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel BBPower on page 158 Trigger Polarity Sets the polarity of the trigger source The sweep starts after a positive or negative edge of the trigger signal The default setting is Pos The setting applies to all modes with the exception of the Free Run and Time mode Pos Level triggering the sweep is stopped by the logic 0 signal and restar ted by the logical 1 signal after the gate delay time has elapsed Neg Edge triggering the sweep is continued on a 0 to 1 transition for the gate length duration after the gate delay time has elapsed Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe on page 161 SENSe SWEep EGATe POLarity on page 150 Trigger Offset Opens an edit dialog box to enter the time offset between the trigger signal and the start of the sweep The time may be entered in multiples of 125 ns in the range 13 s to 13 s default 0 s offset gt 0 start of the sweep is delayed offset
217. frequency x 1 phase deviation If the center frequency of the analyzer is not set exactly to the signal frequency the demodulation bandwidth must be selected larger by the carrier offset in addition to the requirement described above This also applies if FM or PM AC coupling has been selected In general the demodulation bandwidth should be as narrow as possible to improve the S N ratio The residual FM caused by noise floor and phase noise increases dramatically with the bandwidth especially with FM 2 1 3 Configuring Traces 1 To open the trace wizard press the TRACE key and then the Trace Wizard softkey see Trace Wizard on page 59 Tip Context sensitive menus for traces Traces have context sensitive menus If you right click on a trace in the display or a trace setting in the information channel bar or touch it for about 1 second a menu is displayed which corresponds to the softkey Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 13 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 El Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 functions available for traces This is useful for example when the softkey display is hidden If a menu entry contains an arrow to the right of it a submenu is available for that entry To close the menu press the ESC key or click in the display outside of the menu Li x Selected Trace Patara Trace Auto Trace Mode Detector Select Trace 2 Blan
218. ftkey This softkey resets the level measurement duration for automatic leveling to the default value of 100 ms Upper Level Hysteresis Settings Defines an upper threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is auto matically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis UPPer on page 141 Lower Level Hysteresis Settings Defines a lower threshold the signal must exceed before the reference level is automat ically adjusted when the Auto Level function is performed Remote command SENSe ADJust CONFiguration HYSTeresis LOWer on page 141 AF Auto Scale Activates automatic scaling of the y axis for AF measurements RF power and RF spec trum measurements are not affected by the auto scaling Remote command SENSe ADJust SCALe Y AUTO CONTinuous on page 142 Softkeys of the Bandwidth Menu BW Key R amp S FSV K7 The following table shows all softkeys available in the Bandwidth menu in Analog Demodulation mode BW key It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or mea surement mode this information is delivered in the corresponding softkey description EE ET 50 Runn BE 50 Meas RE 50 PA ENEE edit eelsten get eege eeh E iere 50 MEN 50 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 49 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation O
219. ge 224 Search Signals Intermod Distortion Starts the search of the signals required for the intermodulation distortion measurement Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion IMD SEARchsignal ONCE on page 225 n dB down Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value to define the level spacing of the two temporary markers to the right and left of marker 1 default setting 3 dB Activates the temporary markers T1 and T2 The values of the temporary markers T1 T2 and the entered value ndB are displayed in the marker field If a positive value is entered the markers T1 and T2 are placed below the active reference marker If a negative value e g for notch filter measurements is entered the markers T1 and T2 are placed above the active reference marker Marker T1 is placed to the left and marker T2 to the right of the reference marker In the marker table the following results are displayed Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 216 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S a a l M MMN Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Span setting Parameter name Description span gt 0 Bw frequency spacing of the two temporary markers Q factor quality of the displayed bandwidth value Bw span 0 PWid pulse width between the two temporary markers If it is not possible to form the frequency spacing for the n dB value e g because of noise display dashes instead of a
220. ge trace mode cescscssceeeeeseeceseseseeeeeeeeeeeseeees 16 56 KI 185 A Weighted KS iniaa von 181 Elke ee gege EE 31 52 192 206 Display configuration 0ec eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeseeeneeteeenees 27 display range B IOVGl sc ccscstdsctttaics erncts sect E 42 43 44 Display range bandwidth Le Une 38 resolution analog demodulation 0000000ea 50 204 Bandwidth menu E analog demodulation ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 49 KTS eeschte 203 Electronic input attenuation Blank trace mode ccccesccsessseseeceseesestesenesssseeetenes 16 57 FSV B25 EEN 173 EX IQ BOX 77 C DigIConf v 78 OXPOMIOMMAL sec sider nar E 23 CCIR External Mixer B21 ie UE 31 52 192 206 softkey a n CCIT external noise source G d r SOPKECY steen eteideeeeeeed eegen dee neea es 30 52 192 206 external trigget c cceseciecaeessecdsenesssteesesssaeenccenessens Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 250 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Index F Filters A Weighted AAA 31 52 192 206 fixed RE e 70 213 FM UE 63 FIM Sterne WEE 180 FM Stereo Menu KI 180 Frequency VE 38 Frequency menu analog demodulation cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 38 Full Scale Level Digital UO Interface remote control ee 172 Digital Q EE 76 H Hysteresis Lower Auto level c ccceeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeteneeeeeneeeeeees 49 Upper Auto level ccccceeeeeeeeeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeee
221. gerlevel lt 5dBm RF Att max 30 dBm for Preamp OFF 40dBm RF Att lt Triggerlevel lt 11dBm RF Att max 30 dBm for Preamp ON with 500 MHz lt InputSignal lt 7 GHz Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 62 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Note If input values outside of this range occur e g for fullspan measurements the sweep may be aborted and a message indicating the allowed input values is displayed in the status bar Remote command TRIG SOUR RFP see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 SWE EGAT SOUR RFP for gated triggering see SENSe SWEep EGATe SOURce on page 151 IF Power lt Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the measurement channel For this purpose the R amp S FSV uses a level detector at the second intermediate fre quency The available trigger levels depend on the RF attenuation and preamplification A refer ence level offset if defined is also considered For details on available trigger levels and trigger bandwidths see the data sheet The bandwidth at the intermediate frequency is 20 MHz The R amp S FSV is triggered as soon as the trigger level is exceeded within a 10 MHz range around the selected fre quency start frequency in the frequency sweep Thus the measurement of spurious emissions e g
222. gt 1 6 trace Parameters lt Function gt APEak NEGative POSitive SAMPle RMS AVERage QPEak RST APEak For details on detectors refer to chapter 2 1 7 Detector Over view on page 17 Example DET POS Sets the detector to positive peak SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion AUTO lt State gt This command either couples the detector to the current trace setting or turns coupling off Suffix lt trace gt 1 6 trace Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 153 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 3 7 2 3 7 1 2 3 7 2 2 3 7 1 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example DET AUTO OFF TRACe Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The TRACe subsystem controls access to the instruments internal trace memory Commands of the TRACe SUDSYStOM 0 00 eee ee cece eeeeete eter ee eeaeeeeeeeetaaeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeneeaas 154 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Fommat 155 Commands of the TRACe subsystem TRACe lt n gt DATA lt ResultType gt This command returns the current trace data or measurement results In case of several result displays you have to use specific parameters to query the results For details on saving and recalling data refer to the MMEMory subsystem in the description of the base unit Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window For applicati
223. gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown on page 98 CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESu1t on page 100 CALC MARK FUNC NDBD QFAC see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor on page 100 CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD FREQ span gt 0 see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency on page 99 CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD TIME span 0 see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME on page 101 Marker Peak List Opens the Peak List submenu to define criteria for the sort order and the contents of the peak list For each listed peak the frequency Stimulus and level Response values are given In addition the peaks are indicated in the trace display A maximum of 50 entries are listed Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt on page 97 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks X on page 97 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks Y on page 98 Peak List On Off Marker Peak List Activates deactivates the marker peak list If activated the peak list is displayed and the peaks are indicated in the trace display Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT on page 93 Sort Mode Freq Lvl Marker Peak List Defines the criteria for sorting Freq sorting in ascending order of frequency values span gt 0 or
224. gt Y SPACing lt ScalingType gt This command selects the scaling of the y axis For AF spectrum displays only the parameters LINear and LOGarithmic are permit ted Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt ScalingType gt LOGarithmic Logarithmic scaling LiNear Linear scaling in LDB Linear scaling in dB RST LOGarithmic Example DISP TRAC Y SPAC LIN Select a linear scale DISPlay WSELect Queries the currently selected window Example DISP WIND2 SEL Switches the focus area to screen B DISP WSEL Result 2 Usage Query only SCPI confirmed Mode ADEMOD Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 112 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 3 4 2 3 5 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 INSTrument Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The INSTrument subsystem selects the operating mode of the unit either via text param eters or fixed numbers INS TrumenttSE beet sioec cc cdi ers nti neceee ie EEEREN E AAA T aed 113 INSTrument LEE 113 INSTrument SELect lt Mode gt Selects the instrument mode Parameters lt Mode gt ADEMod Analog Demodulation option R amp S FSV K7 SFM FM Stereo option R amp S FSV K7S Mode ADEMOD SFM INSTrument NSELect lt Mode gt lt Mode gt Selects the instrument mode Parameters lt Mode gt 3 Analog Demodulation option R amp S FSV
225. he following demodulation bandwidth range Note For FM stereo measurements K7S the demodulation bandwidth is always 400 kHz thus the deemphasis is always active 25 Us 25 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 40 MHz 50 us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 75 Us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 750 us 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 31 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Dee Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 The following table shows the required demodulation bandwidth for an error less than 0 5 dB up to a maximum AF frequency deemphasis 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us max AF frequency 25 kHz 12 kHz 8 kHz 800 Hz required demodulation bandwidth 2200 kHz 2100kHz 250 kHz 2 6 4 kHz For higher AF frequencies the demodulation bandwidth must be increased Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis STATe on page 146 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCONstant on page 146 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer DEMPhasis STATe on page 231 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer DEMPhasis TCONstant on page 231 All AF Filter Off AF Filter AM Disables all specified AF Filters Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt AOFF on page 144 AF Range AM Opens a submenu to define the diagram scaling for AF displ
226. he labels correspond to the marker number in the marker peak list Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE ANN LAB STAT OFF Removes the peak labels from the diagram CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE lt MaxNoPeaks gt This command defines the maximum number of peaks the marker peak list may contain Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt MaxNoPeaks gt Maximum number of peaks to be determined RST 50 Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE LIST SIZE 10 The marker peak list will contain a maximum of 10 peaks CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT lt State gt This command turns a peak search on and off Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE STAT ON Activates marker peak search CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise lt State gt This command switches the phase noise measurement for the specified marker on or off in the specified window The phase noise power density is measured at the position of the markers The result can be queried with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult on page 92 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 93 R amp S FSV
227. he sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 100 points Inthe range from 1001 to 32001 the sweep points are increased or decreased in steps of 1000 points e Entry via keypad All values in the defined range can be set The default value is 691 sweep points Remote command SENSe SWEep POINts on page 152 Softkeys of the Trace Menu TRACE key R amp S FSV K7 The TRACE key is used to configure the data acquisition for measurement and the analysis of the measurement data Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the active trace 1 2 3 4 5 6 and opens the Trace Mode submenu for the selected trace The default setting is trace 1 in the overwrite mode see Clear Write on page 15 the other traces are switched off see Blank on page 16 For details see chapter 2 1 4 Trace Mode Overview on page 15 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 55 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Tip To configure several traces in one step press the Trace Wizard softkey to open a trace configuration dialog See also chapter 2 1 3 Configuring Traces on page 13 Remote command Selected via numeric suffix of TRACe lt 1 6 gt commands Clear Write Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting All available detectors can b
228. he trace display Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks STAT on page 93 Sort Mode Freq Lvl Marker Peak List Defines the criteria for sorting Freq sorting in ascending order of frequency values span gt 0 or time values span 0 Lvi sorting in ascending order of the level Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT on page 97 SSS eee Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 217 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S EE Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Max Peak Count Marker Peak List Defines the maximum number of peaks to be determined and displayed Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks LIST SIZE on page 93 Peak Excursion Marker Peak List Opens an edit dialog box for level measurements to enter the minimum level value by which a signal must rise or fall so that it will be identified as a maximum or a minimum by the search functions Entries from 0 dB to 80 dB are allowed the resolution is 0 1 dB The default setting for the peak excursion is 6 dB For more information see Specifying the suitable peak excursion and Effect of different peak excursion settings Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 101 Left Limit Marker Peak List Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the lower limit left vertical line S1 for span
229. he value for the trigger hysteresis for IF power or RF Power trigger sources The hysteresis in dB is the value the input signal must stay below the power trigger level in order to allow a trigger to start the measurement The range of the value is between 3 dB and 50 dB with a step width of 1 dB Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 157 Trigger Holdoff Defines the value for the trigger holdoff The holdoff value in s is the time which must pass before triggering in case another trigger event happens This softkey is only available if IF Power RF Power or BBPower is the selected trig ger source Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 157 For digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff on page 156 Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu MKR FUNC Key R amp S FSV K7S The MKR FUNC menu provides the following functions Select Marker ING ET 213 PROP FIMO DEEG 213 Det Fixed OMOT deene ee ite 213 Geet 213 L Ref Point Frequency span gt 0 Ref Point Time Zero span 213 PAO estes eae ea ee 214 DF e ER tele ET 214 L Diff Freq Distortion OM Off ccccssscsssssescsescessscsesescsesescsesescseseecsesescecseeeeeas 215 IE EE 215 eegener deeg 215 ug run ee D ee ne DEE 215 L ntermod Distortion OniOg 216 EUND DB ieia a engel 216 L Search Ne EE 216 MAB CHOW EE 216 Marke
230. he weighting filter is active in the following demod ulation bandwidth range 100 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 0 MHz For FM stereo K7S the filter is active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe on page 145 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCIR WEIGhted STATe on page 230 A Weighted Weighting AF Filter Switches on the A weighted filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodu lation bandwidth range Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 52 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Dee Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 100 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 800 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt AWEighted STATe on page 144 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer AWEighted STATe on page 229 Deemphasis AF Filter Opens the Deemphasis selection list to switch on a deemphasis with the given time constant The deemphasis is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range Note For FM stereo measurements K7S the demodulation bandwidth is always 400 kHz thus the deemphasis is always active 25 Us 25 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 40 MHz 50 us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 75 us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 750 us 800 Hz lt demodulation b
231. i e if the signal falls below a defined threshold the demodulated data is automatically set to 0 This is useful for example to avoid demod ulation noise during transmission breaks Remote command SENSe ADEMod SQUelch STATe on page 138 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 196 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Squelch Level lt Left Defines the level threshold below which the demodulated data is set to 0 if squelching is enabled The squelch level is an absolute value Remote command SENSe ADEMod SQUelch LEVel on page 138 Right Displays the right signal of the FM stereo input and the Right submenu which is identical to the Left submenu see Left on page 185 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 MPX Displays the MPX signal of the FM stereo input and the MPX submenu which is identical to the Left submenu see Left on page 185 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Mono Displays the mono signal of the FM stereo input Left channel Right channel and the Mono submenu which is identical to the Left submenu see Left on page 185 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Stereo Displays the stereo signal of the FM stereo input Left channel Right channel and the Stereo submenu which is identical to the Left submen
232. iMAX IEEE 802 16e OFDMA WiBro measurements option R amp S FSV K93 NF Noise Figure measurements R amp S FSV K30 PHN Phase Noise measurements R amp S FSV K40 PSM Power Sensor measurements option R amp S FSV K9 SFM Stereo FM measurements optionR amp S FSV K7S SPECM Spectogram mode option R amp S FSV K14 TDS TD SCDMA base station UE measurements option R amp S FSV K76 K77 VSA Vector Signal Analysis option R amp S FSV K70 WCDMA 3GPP Base Station measurements option R amp S FSV K72 3GPP UE measure ments option R amp S FSV K73 WLAN WLAN TX measurements option R amp S FSV K91 The spectrum analysis mode is implemented in the basic unit For the other modes the corresponding options are required Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 a ee Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Upper Lower Case Notation Upper lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Special Characters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these keywords needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which o
233. ies in zero span gt 7 GHZ In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 45 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz this function is available again When the electronic attenuator is switched off the corresponding RF attenuation mode auto manual is automatically activated Remote command INPut EATT AUTO on page 174 El Atten Mode Auto Man This softkey defines whether the electronic attenuator value is to be set automatically or manually If manual mode is selected an edit dialog box is opened to enter the value This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 and only if the electronic attenu ator has been activated via the El Atten On Off softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequencies in zero span gt 7 GHz In this case the electronic and mechanical attenuation are summarized and the electronic attenuation can no longer be defined individually As soon as the stop or center frequency is reduced below 7 GHz electronic attenuation is available again If the electronic attenuation was defined manually it must be re defined The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 30 dB Other entries are
234. ils see the base unit Operating Manual Remote command PROBe STATe on page 114 PROBe SETup MODE on page 114 Signal Source Opens a dialog box to select the signal source For Digital Baseband OI the source can also be configured here Input Path Signal Source Defines whether the RF Radio Frequency or the Digital IQ input path is used for measurements Digital IQ is only available if option R amp S FSV B17 R amp S Digital UO Interface is installed Note Note that the input path defines the characteristics of the signal which differ sig nificantly between the RF input and digital input Remote command INPut SELect on page 175 Connected Device Signal Source Displays the name of the device connected to the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 to provide Digital IQ input The device name cannot be changed here The device name is unknown Remote command INPut DIQ CDEVice on page 171 Input Sample Rate Signal Source Defines the sample rate of the digital UO signal source This sample rate must correspond with the sample rate provided by the connected device e g a generator Remote command INPut DIQ SRATe on page 173 Full Scale Level Signal Source The Full Scale Level defines the level that should correspond to an UO sample with the magnitude 1 The level can be defined either in dBm or Volt Remote command INPut DIQ RANGe UPPer on page 172
235. ines the marker position on the x axis The unit is either Hz frequency domain or s time domain or dB sta tistics Range The range depends on the current x axis range Example CALC MARK2 X 1 7MHz Positions marker 2 to frequency 1 7 MHz CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits LEFT lt Limit gt This command sets the left limit of the marker search range If the power measurementin Zero span is active this command limits the evaluation range to the trace Note The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 103 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt Limit gt The value range depends on the span or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements Range 0 to MAX RST left diagram border Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM LEFT 10MHz Sets the left limit of the search range to 10 MHz CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT lt Limit gt This command sets the right limit of the marker search range If the power measurementin Zero span is active this command limits the eval
236. ini iain ia 159 TRlGoerznztGtOuencell EVel DM 160 ele ER TE EE 160 TRiGger lt n SEQuenceLEVelVIDGO 0 0222 ces enedee etn Bienen ead eddie versa 160 TRIGJer m SE QUCICE SE TEE 161 TRlGoerznztGtOuencel GOUlbce eee caee ee ceteeeeeeeeee eee eaeaaaaateeeeeeeeeeeeesaaaaceeeeeeeeeeees 161 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff lt Value gt This command sets the holding time before the next BB power trigger event for digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 156 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt Value gt RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR BBP Sets the baseband power trigger source TRIG BBP HOLD 200 ns Sets the holding time to 200 ns Mode all TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence HOLDoff TIME lt Delay gt This command defines the length of the trigger delay A negative delay time pretrigger can be set in zero span only Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Delay gt Range zero span sweeptime see data sheet to 30 s span 0 to 30s RST Os Example TRIG HOLD 500us TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff lt Value gt This command sets the holding time before the next IF power trigger event Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt RST 150 ns Example TRIG SOUR IFP
237. ion K7 For details see chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Remote command DET RMS see SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion on page 153 Average lt Detector Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the Average detector For details see chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Remote command DET AVER see SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion on page 153 Quasipeak Detector Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the Quasipeak detector The quasipeak detector is available with option R amp S FSV K54 For details see chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Remote command DET QPE see SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion on page 153 CISPR Average lt Detector Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the CISPR Average detector The CISPR Average detector is available with option R amp S FSV K54 For details see chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Remote command DET CAV see SENSe WINDow DETector lt trace gt FUNCtion on page 153 RMS Average lt Detector Trace 1 Trace 2 Trace 3 Trace 4 Trace 5 Trace 6 Selects the RMS Average detector The quasipeak detector is available with option R amp S FSV K54 For details see chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Remote command DET CRMS se
238. ion list to select the weighting AF filter Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 51 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 None Weighting AF Filter Deactivates the weighting filter This is the default setting Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs STATe on page 146 CCITT Weighting AF Filter Switches on a CCITT P 53 weighting filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 20 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz For FM stereo K7S the filter is active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT on page 145 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCITt STATe on page 230 CCIR Unweighted Weighting AF Filter Switches on the CCIR unweighted filter which is the combination of the 20 Hz highpass and 23 kHz low pass filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 1 6 MHz For FM stereo K7S the filter is active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR UNWeighted STATe on page 145 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCIR UNWeighted STATe on page 230 CCIR Weighted Weighting AF Filter Switches on the CCIR weighted filter T
239. is command activates deactivates the selected low pass filter in the specified window For details on the low pass filter refer to Low Pass on page 29 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example FILT LPAS ON Activates the selected low pass filter Mode ADEMOD SENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency ABSolute lt FilterType gt This command selects the absolute low pass filter type in the specified window For details on filters refer to Low Pass on page 29 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 147 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 3 6 7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 For details about the demodulation bandwidth range refer to Demod BW on page 29 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt FilterType gt 3kHz 15kHz 150kHz RST 15kHz Example FILT LPAS FREQ 150kHz Selects the low pass filter for the demodulation bandwidth range from 400 kHz to 16 MHz Mode ADEMOD SENSe FlLTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative lt FilterType gt This command selects the relative low pass filter type in the specified window For details on filters refer to Low Pass softkey For details about the demodulation bandwidth range refer to Demod BW on page 29 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Parameters lt FilterType gt 5PCT 10PCT 25PCT RST 25PCT Example FILT LPAS FREQ 25PCT Selects the low pa
240. is defined by the FORMat command see chapter 2 3 6 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 115 The output units are described in CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 101 Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Query parameters lt TraceMode gt WRITe At least one screen must display a channel with the specified channel type that has the trace mode Write specified using SENSe ADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE on page 121 Otherwise a query error is generated Example SFM LEFT AFSP RES MINH Returns the minimum value in the left channel after a series of measurements Usage Query only Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FiLTer AWEighted STATe lt State gt This command activates deactivates the weighted CCIR filter for the specified channel type For details on the weighted A filter see A Weighted on page 31 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 229 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example SFM LEFT FILT AWEI ON Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FiLTer CCITt STAT
241. ise measurement at the delta marker position on and off The correction values for the bandwidth and the log amplifier are taken into account in the measurement The reference marker for phase noise measurements is either a normal marker or a fixed reference If necessary the command turns on the reference marker A fixed reference point can be modified with the CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint X and CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion FIXed RPOint Y commands independent of the position of marker 1 and of a trace Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Note marker 2 is always the deltamarker for phase noise mea surement results Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise measurement with all delta markers CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO X 128 MHZ Sets the frequency reference to 128 MHz CALC DELT FUNC FIX RPO Y 30 DBM Sets the reference level to 30 dBm CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise AUTO lt State gt This command turns an automatic peak search for the fixed reference marker at the end of a sweep on and off Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 166 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 REENERT Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulati
242. k Auto Peak s Trace 3 Auto Peak Z 4 gt lt I b lt I Trace 4 Blank Auto Peak 4 lt I Trace 5 Blank Auto Peak S H lt i 4 gt lt i Trace 6 Blank Auto Peak Preset Select Select All Traces Max Avg Min Max ClrWrite Min 2 For each trace you can define the following settings Clear Write Max Hold Min Hold Average View Blank For details see chapter 2 1 4 Trace Mode Overview on page 15 Display Mode Detector Auto Select Activates automatic detector selection see Auto Select softkey If acti vated the Trace Detector setting is ignored Trace Detector Defines a specific trace detector If one of the following settings is defined the Detector Auto Select option is deactivated e Auto Select on page 57 Auto Peak on page 58 Positive Peak on page 58 Negative Peak on page 58 Sample on page 58 RMS on page 58 Average on page 59 Quasipeak on page 59 3 To configure several traces to predefined display modes in one step press the button for the required function TEE Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 14 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 El Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Preset All Traces Trace 1 Clear Write Trace 2 6 Blank Select Max Avg Min Trace 1 Max Hold Trace 2 Average Trace 3 Min Hold Trace 4 6 B
243. ket Off es cissisavencenesncausscensceneetctvastarcpashuenesee 67 68 AM FM PM RF remote control analog demodulation AMIK d oases Sos eters etches eereeeeae teenie E ASCII File Export ccssscencesescsocencenceceneanencotenes ASCII File Export remote control ASCII Trace Export sserrsssssrsesnerrernasaessarsandnnaraasrinasnas UE ege ee gege Average Mode remote control Ge A Weighted remote control 0 eee erence eee CF Stepsize remote control sa se eeens Continue Single Sweep remote control 178 Continuous Sweep remote control ee 179 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 252 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Cont Meas remote Control 179 Decim SOP ME 61 74 219 Deemphasis remote control analog demodulation Ed ebe Eed 146 Demod BW analog demodulation 29 41 50 Demod BW remote control analog demodulation Dem d Nol Demod Filter remote control S Detector Auto Select remote Control 153 Detector Manual Select remote control 153 Deviation Lin Log Ki 33 195 200 Deviation Lin Log remote control see sessen 112 Dev per Division KO 32 194 199 Display Contig K7 0 cscseshcccesceti ee cceeeideecetse 185 Display Config remote control analog demodulation Display Config remote control El Atten Mode Auto Man 1 Ext mal ajror na FM K7 D RE Full Span analog d
244. l see Level Unit on page 77 The availability of units depends on the measurement application you are using This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt Level gt V dBm dBpW W dBmV dBuV dBuA A RST Volt Example INP DIQ RANG UNIT A Mode IQ VSA EVDO CDMA WCDMA GSM ADEMOD TDS INPut DIQ SRATe lt SampleRate gt This command specifies or queries the sample rate of the input signal from the R amp S Digital I Q Interface see Input Sample Rate on page 76 Note the final user sample rate of the R amp S FSV may differ and is defined using SENSe ADEM SRATe see SENSe ADEMod SRATe on page 139 This command is only available if the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 is installed For details see the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 description of the base unit Parameters lt SampleRate gt Range 1 Hz to 10 GHz RST 32 MHz Example INP DIQ SRAT 200 MHz Mode A IQ NF TDS VSA CDMA EVDO WCDMA ADEMOD GSM OFDM OFDMA WiBro WLAN INPut EATT lt Attenuation gt This command defines the electronic attenuation If necessary the command also turns the electronic attenuator on Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 173 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodula
245. l help gt To display the general help dialog box press the HELP key on the front panel The help dialog box View tab is displayed A topic containing information about the current menu or the currently opened dialog box and its function is displayed For standard Windows dialog boxes e g File Properties Print dialog etc no context sensitive help is available gt Ifthe help is already displayed press the softkey for which you want to display help A topic containing information about the softkey and its function is displayed If a softkey opens a submenu and you press the softkey a second time the submenu of the softkey is displayed Contents of the help dialog box The help dialog box contains four tabs e Contents contains a table of help contents e View contains a specific help topic e Index contains index entries to search for help topics e Zoom contains zoom functions for the help display To change between these tabs press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the table of contents e To move through the displayed contents entries use the UP ARROW and DOWN ARROW keys Entries that contain further entries are marked with a plus sign e Todisplay a help topic press the ENTER key The View tab with the corresponding help topic is displayed e To change to the next tab press the tab on the touchscreen Navigating in the help topics e To scroll through a page use the rotary knob or
246. lank Select Max ClrWrite Min Trace 1 Max Hold Trace 2 Clear Write Trace 3 Min Hold Trace 4 6 Blank For details see chapter 2 1 4 Trace Mode Overview on page 15 2 1 4 Trace Mode Overview The traces can be activated individually for a measurement or frozen after completion of a measurement Traces that are not activate are hidden Each time the trace mode is changed the selected trace memory is cleared The R amp S FSV offers 6 different trace modes Clear Write Overwrite mode the trace is overwritten by each sweep This is the default setting All available detectors can be selected Remote command DISP TRAC MODE WRIT see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 108 Max Hold The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is greater than the previous one The detector is automatically set to Positive Peak This mode is especially useful with modulated or pulsed signals The signal spectrum is filled up upon each sweep until all signal components are detected in a kind of envelope This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MAXH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 108 Min Hold The minimum value is determined from several measurements and displayed The R amp S FSV saves the smallest of the previous
247. lation R amp S FSV K7 For 2101 samples The schema of the result string is as follows lt NoOfDataBytes gt lt valuel gt lt value2 gt lt value n gt with Header prefix 1 byte 1 byte lt NoOfDataBytes gt number of following data bytes 1024 in the example 10 bytes 1 byte lt Value gt Data values each one is a 4 byte floating point value Example 1677721600 lt value 1 gt lt value 2 gt lt value 419430400 gt 1677721600 1677721600 Bytes of following data float 4 Bytes value gt 1677721600 4 419430400 values 200Ms and 200Ms Q values lt value x gt 4 Byte values must be interpreted as float TRIGger Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The TRIGger subsystem is used to synchronize instrument actions with events It is thus possible to control and synchronize the start of a sweep TRlGoerznztGtOuencel DBbower HOL Dot 156 TRiGger n gt SEQuence HOLDonpe ME Eddi SA 157 TRiGger lt n gt SEQuence IFRowerHOUDoff iiini aaa ia aai 157 TRlGoerznztGtOuencelltbowerHvGTeresle erer ererororrrerrrnsnrnrerenereeerereno 157 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVekAM EABSolute 0 1a anadenn 158 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel AM RELAative iiini naiiai 158 TRlGoerznztGtOuencell EVel DBtower eee eeeteseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeaaaadeeeeteeeeeeeees 158 TRlGoerznztGtOuencell EVel EM 159 ele Ee El EE 159 TRiGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVeliRFPOWE unis
248. lation R amp S FSV K7 Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT1 ON Switches marker 1 to delta marker mode CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt TRACe lt TraceNumber gt This command selects the trace a delta marker is positioned on The corresponding trace must have a trace mode other than Blank Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt TraceNumber gt 1 6 Trace number the marker is positioned on Example CALC DELT3 TRAC 2 Assigns delta marker 3 to trace 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X lt Position gt This command positions a delta marker on a particular coordinate on the x axis The position is an absolute value Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt Position gt 0 to maximum frequency or sweep time Example CALC DELT X Outputs the absolute frequency time of delta marker 1 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt X RELative This command queries the x value of the selected delta marker relative to marker 1 or to the reference position for CALC DELT FUNC FIX STAT ON The command activates the corresponding delta marker if necessary Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 168 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog
249. layed instead of a diagram e RF Diagrams Which type of diagram is displayed this is the standard R amp S FSV K7 diagram type For details on the result diagram types see chapter 2 1 9 Measurement Result Display on page 20 e FM Stereo Diagrams Which type of FM stereo diagram is displayed each mea surement type can be displayed either in the time domain or as a spectrum Note Summaries that take up the entire width of the screen are displayed as tables if only half the screen width is available 2 windows next to each other the summary is displayed as a list Thus the factory set predefined screen configurations contain only 3 screens 2 for diagrams and one full width screen for the summary Remote command INSTrument SELect on page 113 Activates stereo fm demodulation CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Defines the display configuration Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 186 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S EH Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Predefined Display Config Left You can store and load predefined screen configurations All available configurations are displayed in the Predefined tab The current screen configuration is indicated under Current at the top of the list Display Configuration x Predefined A Left Time Domain B MPX Spectrum A Left Time Domain B Left Spectrum Ee CT EE A Right Time Domain B Righ
250. le measured value is accessible and its value is displayed in the marker field The number of measured values is defined in the Sweep Points softkey menu via the Sweep Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 68 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 2 11 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 This functionality is available for all base unit measurements with the exception of sta tistics APD and CCDF softkeys in the Measurement menu Remote command CALC MARK X SSIZ POIN see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SSIZe on page 105 Marker Zoom span gt 0 Opens an edit dialog box to enter a display range for the zoom The area around marker 1 is expanded accordingly and more details of the result can be seen If no marker is activated marker 1 is switched on and set on the largest signal The following sweep is stopped at the position of the reference marker The frequency of the signal is counted and the measured frequency becomes the new center frequency The zoomed display range is then configured and the new settings are used by the R amp S FSV for further measurements If the display has not yet been switched to the new frequency display range and you press the softkey the procedure is aborted If an instrument setting is changed during this operation the procedure is also aborted Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion ZOOM on page 94 Link Mkr
251. le with the FM Stereo option K7S Remote command UNIT RDEV on page 243 Time Domain Zoom AM Opens a submenu to activate and configure the zoom function State On Off Time Domain Zoom AM Activates or deactivates the time domain zoom according to the defined settings ON Activates the time domain zoom The zoom area is defined using the Start Start on page 34 and Length Manual Length Manual on page 34 Length Auto Length Auto on page 35 softkeys OFF If more measured values than measurement points are available sev eral measured values are combined in one measurement point accord ing to the method of the selected trace detector For details on detectors refer to chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STATe on page 139 Start Time Domain Zoom AM Opens an edit dialog box to define the start time for the zoom area Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM STARt on page 139 Length Manual Time Domain Zoom AM Opens an edit dialog box to define the length of the zoom area as a time value manually Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth on page 140 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 34 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Dee Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Length Auto Time Domain Zoom AM Automatically sets the length of
252. lt Summary The result summary displays the results of the evaluation functions for all channels in a table D Result Summary Carrier Power 30 00 dBm Carrier Offset 1 08 Hz ha a PK Noda NAS TH 113 87 kHz 114 06 kHz 3 3 kHz 54 479 dB 61 820 dB PM 1 0028 rad 1 0024 rad Summaries that take up the entire width of the screen are displayed as tables if only half the screen width is available 2 windows next to each other the summary is displayed as a list Thus the factory set predefined screen configurations contain only 3 screens 2 for diagrams and one full width screen for the summary For each channel the following information is provided Label Description Peak Positive peak maximum Peak Negative peak minimum Peak 2 Average of positive and negative peaks RMS Root Mean Square value Mod Freq Modulation frequency Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 22 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 1 10 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Label Description SINAD Signal to noise and distortion Measures the ratio of the total power to the power of noise and har monic distortions The noise and harmonic power is calculated inside the AF spectrum span The DC offset is removed before the calcula tion SINAD dB 20 oe noise distortion power THD Total harmonic distortion The r
253. ly PROBe STATe lt State gt This command activates a connected probe Use this command to switch off the probe and measure the digital input without considering the transducer factor of the probe Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example PROB STAT ON SENSe Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The SENSe subsystem is organized in several subsystems The commands of these subsystems directly control device specific settings they do not refer to the signal char acteristics of the measurement signal Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 114 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh 2 3 6 1 2 3 6 2 2 3 6 3 2 3 6 4 2 3 6 5 2 3 6 6 2 3 6 7 2 3 6 8 2 3 6 9 2 3 6 1 d 2 3 6 2 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The SENSe subsystem controls the essential parameters of the analyzer In accordance with the SCPI standard the keyword SENSe is optional for this reason which means that it is not necessary to include the SENSe node in command sequences The following subsystems are included Trace Mode Result Ty pe s iastsccheaittedseasilenieerd ieee diane ensaennn ices 115 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Fommat 115 SENSe ADEMod Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 cccccceeeees 116 SENSe ADJust Gubevstem e eee eeecte eee eee e ents sere taaaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeaas 141 SENSe BANDwi
254. ly stored currently measured values in the trace memory The detector is automatically set to Negative Peak Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 15 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 This mode is useful e g for making an unmodulated carrier in a composite signal visible Noise interference signals or modulated signals are suppressed whereas a CW signal is recognized by its constant level This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE MINH see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 108 Average The average is formed over several sweeps The Sweep Count determines the number of averaging procedures All available detectors can be selected If the detector is automatically selected the sam ple detector is used see chapter 2 1 7 Detector Overview on page 17 This mode is not available for statistics measurements Remote command DISP TRAC MODE AVER see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 108 View The current contents of the trace memory are frozen and displayed Note If a trace is frozen the instrument settings apart from level range and reference level see below can be changed without impact on the displayed trace The fact that the displayed trace no longer matches the current instrument setting is indicated by the icon
255. m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT lt SortMode gt This command selects the order in which the results of a peak search are returned Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt SortMode gt X Sorts the peaks according to increasing position on the x axis Y Sorts the peaks according to decreasing position on the y axis Example CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks X This command queries the position of the peaks on the x axis The order depends on the sort order that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks SORT on page 97 The number of peaks on the number that has been set with CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 97 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 lt m gt Return values lt PeakPosition gt Example Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Selects the marker Position of the peaks on the x axis The unit depends on the mea surement CALC MARK FUNC FPE SORT Y Sets the sort mode to decreasing y values CALC MARK FUNC FPE 3 Searches the 3 highest maxima for trace 1 CALC MARK FUNC FPE COUN Queries the number of maxima found CALC MARK FUNC FPE X Queries the fr
256. measured value are displayed Remote command CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD STAT ON see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown STATe on page 100 CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD 3dB see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown on page 98 CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD RES see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown RESu1t on page 100 CALC MARK FUNC NDBD QFAC see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown QFACtor on page 100 CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD FREQ span gt 0 see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown FREQuency on page 99 CALC MARK1 FUNC NDBD TIME span 0 see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion NDBDown TIME on page 101 Marker Peak List Opens the Peak List submenu to define criteria for the sort order and the contents of the peak list For each listed peak the frequency Stimulus and level Response values are given In addition the peaks are indicated in the trace display A maximum of 50 entries are listed Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks COUNt on page 97 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks X on page 97 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks Y on page 98 Peak List On Off Marker Peak List Activates deactivates the marker peak list If activated the peak list is displayed and the peaks are indicated in t
257. mentation consists of the following chapters e chapter 2 1 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 on page 10 describes the overall instrument functions and provides further infor mation e chapter 2 2 1 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation Menu R amp S FSV K7 on page 25 shows all softkeys available in the Analog Demod menu This chapter also presents the remote control commands associated with each softkey function e The following chapters describe the softkeys of the other keys for the Analog Demod ulation option e chapter 2 3 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 on page 79 describes all remote control commands defined for the analog demod ulation measurement This part of the documentation includes only functions of the Application Firmware R amp S FSV K7 For all other descriptions please refer to the description of the base unit 2 1 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The digital signal processing in the R amp S FSV used in the analyzer mode for digital IF filters is also ideally suited for demodulating AM FM or PM signals The firmware option R amp S FSV K7 provides the necessary measurement functions The R amp S FSV is equipped with a demodulator that is capable of performing AM FM and PM demodulation at a time Additionally maximum minimum and average or current values can be obtained parallel over a selected number of measurements By sam
258. mmands CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion SFM lt ChannelType gt RESult lt m gt on page 226 lt FCARrier gt The carrier frequency is returned Example CALC1 MARK FUNC SFM RES Usage Query only Mode SFM CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion SFM lt ChannelType gt RESult lt m gt lt MeasType gt This command queries the results of the measurement type for the selected channel in the specified window Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Query parameters lt MeasType gt ALL ADEV RDEV SINad THD AFRequency ALL All available measurement values ADEV The absolute deviation RDEV The relative deviation SINad The signal to noise and distortion value THD Total harmonic distortion AFRequency Audio frequency RST ALL Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 226 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S 3 2 3 Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Return values lt Result gt Measurement value according to the specified measurement type Note if the specified result value is not available a Query Error is returned If all result values are queried query parameter ALL and one of them is not available 9 91E 37 is inserted for the missing value Example CALC1 MARK FUNC SFM LEFT THD Queries the total harmonic distortion for the l
259. modulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt Limitation gt PHASe UPHase PHASe Limitation to 180 UPHase Unwrapped RST UPHase Example CALC FORM PHAS Activates the limitation to 180 Usage SCPI confirmed Mode ADEMOD CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion PNOise RESult This command queries the result of the phase noise measurement at the specified marker in the specified window A complete sweep with synchronization to the sweep end must be performed between switching on the function and querying the measured value in order to obtain a correct query result This is only possible in single sweep mode Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window lt m gt 1 16 marker Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK2 ON Switches on marker 2 CALC MARK2 FUNC PNO ON Switches on the phase noise marker 2 INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK2 PNO RES Outputs the phase noise result of marker 2 Usage Query only Mode ADEMOD CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt FUNCtion FPEaks ANN LAB STAT lt State gt This command turns labels for peaks found during a peak search on and off Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 92 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 T
260. mware version 1 61 the maximum mixer level allowed is 0 dBm Mixer levels above this value may lead to incorrect measurement results which are indicated by the OVLD status display The increased mixer level allows for an improved signal but also increases the risk of overloading the instrument Remote command INPut ATTenuation on page 170 RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto Sets the RF attenuation automatically as a function of the selected reference level This ensures that the optimum RF attenuation is always used It is the default setting This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut ATTenuation AUTO on page 170 El Atten On Off This softkey switches the electronic attenuator on or off This softkey is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 When the electronic attenuator is activated the mechanical and electronic attenuation can be defined separately Note however that both parts must be defined in the same mode i e either both manually or both automatically This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 e To define the mechanical attenuation use the RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual or RF Atten Auto Mech Att Auto softkeys e To define the electronic attenuation use the El Atten Mode Auto Man softkey Note This function is not available for stop frequencies or center frequenc
261. n filter for optimized settling behaviour RST FLAT Example BAND DEM TYPE GAUS Selects the Gaussian filter Mode ADEMOD SENSe ADEMod FM TDOMain TYPE lt Type gt This command selects the result types to be measured simultaneously by FM demodu lation Parameters lt Type gt RST WRITe OFF OFF lt result type 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW OFF for details see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 125 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Example Mode Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 SENSe ADEMod FM TDOMain TYPE on page 125 Creates average max hold and min hold values simultaneously DEM FM WRIT OFF OFF Only creates the current measurement values ADEM FM OFF OFF OFF Switches analog demodulator off ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod FM TDOMain RESult lt Type gt This command reads the result data obtained by analog demodulation for the specified result type The data format of the output data block is defined by the FORMat command Return values lt Type gt Return values Example Mode Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 lt result type gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold for details see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 The result type indicated must be one of those configured by SENSe ADEMod F
262. n the background which means that the measurement speed is independent of the detector combination used for different traces Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 17 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Number of measured values During a frequency sweep the R amp S FSV increments the first local oscillator in steps that are smaller than approximately 1 10 of the bandwidth This ensures that the oscillator step speed is conform to the hardware settling times and does not affect the precision of the measured power The number of measured values taken during a sweep is independent of the number of oscillator steps It is always selected as a multiple or a fraction of 691 default number of trace points displayed on the screen Choosing less then 691 measured values e g 125 or 251 will lead to an interpolated measurement curve choosing more than 691 points e g 1001 2001 will result in several measured values being overlaid at the same frequency position RMS detector and VBW If the RMS detector is selected the video bandwidth in the hardware is bypassed Thus duplicate trace averaging with small VBWs and RMS detector no longer occurs However the VBW is still considered when calculating the sweep time This leads to a longer sweep time for small VBW values Thus you can reduce the VBW value to achieve more stable trace curves even
263. nal can be reduced by high pass or low pass filters and also a de emphasis can be switched on The selected filters are used for AM FM and PM demodulation in common Individual settings are not possible High Pass lt AF Filter Opens the High Pass selection list to switch on a high pass filter with the given limit to separate the DC component The filters are indicated by the 3 dB cutoff frequency The 50 Hz and 300 Hz filters are designed as 2nd order Butterworth filter 12 dB octave The 20 Hz filter is designed as 3rd order Butterworth filter 18 dB octave None deactivates the AF high pass filter Default is None Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 50 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 The high pass filters are active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 20 Hz 100 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 1 6 MHz 50 Hz 200 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz 300 Hz 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 8 MHz Note for FM stereo K7S all filters are active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs STATe on page 146 SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs FREQuency on page 147 Low Pass lt AF Filter Opens the Low Pass selection list to select the filter type Relative and absolute low pass filter are available e Absolute low pass filt
264. nalysis mode is implemented in the basic unit For the other modes the corresponding options are required Upper Lower Case Notation Upper lower case letters are used to mark the long or short form of the key words of a command in the description The instrument itself does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters Special Characters A selection of key words with an identical effect exists for several commands These keywords are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these keywords needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the keywords is used Example SENSe FREQuency CW FIXed The two following commands with identical meaning can be created They set the fre quency of the fixed frequency signal to 1 kHz SENSe FREQuency CW 1E3 SENSe FREQuency FIXed 1E3 A vertical stroke in parameter indications marks alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Selection of the parameters for the command SENSe lt 1 4 gt AVERage lt 1 4 gt TYPE VIDeo LINear Key words in square brackets can be omitted when composing the header The full command length must be accepted by the instrument for reasons of compatibility with the SCPI standards Parameters in square brackets can be in
265. ncy distortion measure ment Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion DFD SEARchsignal ONCE on page 224 Intermod Distortion Opens a submenu to enable and configure intermodulation distortion measurement This function is only available for AF spectrum measurements Definition of the intermodulation distortion f1 and f2 represent the frequencies of two sine wave signals f2 should be at least 8 f1 The level of f2 should be 1 4th of the level of f1 The modulation factors of 2nd and 3rd order dm2 dm3 are defined as follows fi f2 2f1 f2 2 2f1 f2 f1 Get diac Ux f2 fi U2x f2 fu Ux f2 100 for percentage indication or Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 215 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S da2 20 let U2 ft ma fi for indication in dB dm3 U f242f UAf2 2 Ux f2 for percentage indication dm3 20 let SEN 100 for indication in dB Intermod Distortion On Off Intermod Distortion Enables intermodulation distortion The results are displayed in the summary table with the function IModDist 2 3 The markers are indicated as IMD2 IMD3 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion IMD STATe on page 224 Unit DB Intermod Distortion Sets the unit to percent or DB for intermodulation distortion Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion IMD UNIT on pa
266. nd TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HYSTeresis on page 157 Trigger Holdoff Defines the value for the trigger holdoff The holdoff value in s is the time which must pass before triggering in case another trigger event happens This softkey is only available if IF Power RF Power or BBPower is the selected trig ger source Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence IFPower HOLDoff on page 157 For digital input via the R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence BBPower HOLDoff on page 156 Softkeys of the Marker Menu MKR key R amp S FSV K7 The following table shows all softkeys available in the Marker menu in Analog Demod ulation mode MKR key It is possible that your instrument configuration does not pro vide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measure ment mode this information is provided in the corresponding softkey description Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker NormdDelta 66 More E EE 66 Marker to TAGES orcino aa aa eaa Ea K aa a EE aa aa aeaaea 66 Marker Wizard EE 66 L AlliMarker GE 67 PRAM lg EE 68 Ee e E 68 Marker EE 68 L Stepsize Stet niecce iera i ae E eE E EA 68 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 65 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 a a ee a eS Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 L Stepsize Sweep Points 68 Marker Zoom GPa gt ET 69
267. neeeeeeas 49 l IEC IEEE bus Command description cccceccceeeeeteeeeeteeees 81 220 Impedance IR Input Output menu Input sample rate Digital lQ ee snee aea a srr rors enero Cree Sere rere 76 Intermod Distortion SONKEY aasien er onia a 215 224 Intermod Distortion On Off SOMMCY ege anka eare a aE 216 K key MEAS CONFIG KZ creii sinedananarornnsi onerati 26 L Left S lwer deen orretan 185 209 level display TANJE E 42 43 44 FANGS TEE 42 43 44 Level Refer nte onecie nia e 42 198 Level Unit Digital UO Interface remote Control 173 Klee BEE 77 line threshold ek deeg ek eebe deeded 73 218 Lower case COMMANAS cceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeees 82 221 Lower Level Hysteresis le 49 M Marker ZOOM ideias a egie lease bebe gege 69 Marker menu analog demodulation ccceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 65 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 Marker Number SOMMSY siesto E a nia 74 219 Marker Peak List Activating Deactivating eeeeeee eee 72 217 COMMOUNIMNG EE Number display de Number of entries 2 0 0 eect eneeeeneeeeee 72 218 Markers SOTO ACE insupa e iaaa 66 Marker Wizard SOIMKEY EE 66 Max Hold trace mode ccccccceseeeseeeeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeaes 15 56 Max Peak Count SOIMKEY EE 72 218 MEAS CONFIG key Ki a iea A A E AAE ASAE 26 Meas To Ref Result Summary Setup KE 190 menu Amplitude analog demodulation ceee 41 Amplitu
268. ng according to repetition interval SLEFt Triggering via left stereo signal SRIGht Triggering via right stereo signal SMPX Triggering via MPX stereo signal SMONo Triggering via mono stereo signal SSTereo Triggering via stereo FM signal SRDS Triggering via RDS stereo signal SPILot Triggering via pilot stereo signal RST IMM TRIG SEQ SOUR SRDS Defines triggering on the RDS stereo signal 241 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S EE 3 2 6 Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Mode SFM UNIT Subsystem FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S UNIT ADEV lt Unit gt Selects the unit for absolute deviation measurements Parameters lt Unit gt HZ DBM RST HZ Example UNIT ADEV DBM Mode SFM UNIT ANGLe lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for angles e g for PM display The unit is defined globally for all windows Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Unit gt DEG RAD RST RAD Example UNIT ANGL DEG Mode ADEMOD SFM UNIT POWer lt Unit gt This command selects the unit for power The unit is defined globally for all windows Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Unit gt DBM V A W DBPW WATT DBUV DBMV VOLT DBUA AMPere RST dBm Example UNIT POW DBM Sets the power unit to dBm Mode A ADEMOD SFM SPECM Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 242 Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R
269. nit Sets the unit to percent or DB for THD measurements Remote command UNIT THD on page 163 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 44 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 174 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto soft key this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula levelmixer lEVelinput RF attenuation Note As of fir
270. nsentenseneasteessensetoesenueasneeenees 160 TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPE iscicedacccseseesticcsncsostesnsarssensvosessseuconssneustesctensnecaieussdsveerexsucctsetsesseeeseecoianesets TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce TRiGger n SEQuence TIMERINT Crvall sso casccccstcasessnesteacees savenaeaneanesacsacaneescsavens ENEE heey cancaneansexoanncesen 160 le IER 242 IR Te RE 163 UNIT ANGLE Surengrana i a a dia A A 242 UNIT e EE 163 SS ee Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 246 R amp S FSV K7 K7S List of Commands CL LON N E ee Pee ae SOC E eR 242 WIESEN 243 IER 163 RECH 243 ISENSeJADEMod AM BEL athue AFSbechum RESuh 124 ISENSeJADEMod AM BEL atue AFSbechumtTebE SENSe ADEMod AM RELative TDOMain RESult ISENSeJADEMod AM BEL atvet TDOMainfTpE nen ISENSeJADEMod AMtABSohutelt TDOMairlRESu 120 SENSe ADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain TY PE ssscssssssssesssssseessssseessssesesssssseesssseeessssueesssseeessssseeen 121 SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation s sssssssssessssessssseesssssesssssesssssessssseestsseessssesssseesen 125 SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation Tab 125 ISENSe JADEMod EM AkSbechumbRESun eeraa 127 ISENSeIADEMod FEM AkSbechumtTEE 127 ISENSe JADEMod EMOEtSet tabh ttia bkt r as ktn A Ae Aena A An AA At Eaa atena a terrane rnaat SENSe ADEMod FM TDOMain RESult SENSe ADEMod FM TDOMain TYPE SENSE
271. nt Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Right Trigger Source Triggers on the specified frequency level of the right FM signal Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM RIGHt on page 238 MPX lt Trigger Source Triggers on the specified frequency level of the MPX FM signal Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM MPX on page 238 Mono lt Trigger Source Triggers on the specified frequency level of the mono FM signal Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM MONO on page 238 Stereo Trigger Source Triggers on the specified frequency level of the stereo FM signal Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM STEReo on page 239 RDS lt Trigger Source Triggers on the specified frequency level of the RDS FM signal Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM RDS on page 239 Pilot Trigger Source Triggers on the specified frequency level of the pilot FM signal Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel SFM PILot on page 239 RF Trigger Source Triggers on the specified level of the RF signal Note The RF offline trigger is based on the I Q data of the demodulated signal in a very limited bandwidth For a wider trigger bandwidth and triggering based on the currently measured RF input signal use the more powerful RF Power trigger Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel
272. odulation bandwidth is always 400 kHz thus the deemphasis is always active 25 Us 25 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 40 MHz 50 us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 75 us 6 4 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 18 MHz 750 us 800 Hz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz The following table shows the required demodulation bandwidth for an error less than 0 5 dB up to a maximum AF frequency deemphasis 25 us 50 us 75 us 750 us max AF frequency 25 kHz 12 kHz 8 kHz 800 Hz required demodulation bandwidth 2200 kHz 2100kHz 250 kHz 2 6 4 kHz For higher AF frequencies the demodulation bandwidth must be increased Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis STATe on page 146 SENSe FILTer lt n gt DEMPhasis TCONstant on page 146 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer DEMPhasis STATe on page 231 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer DEMPhasis TCONstant on page 231 All AF Filter Off AF Filter Disables all specified AF Filters Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt AOFF on page 144 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu TRIG Key R amp S FSV K7S The following table shows all softkeys available in the Trigger menu in FM Stereo mode TRIG key It is possible that your instrument configuration does not provide all softkeys If a softkey is only available with a special option model or measurement mode this inf
273. og box to enter a value for the upper limit left vertical line S2 for span gt 0 T2 for zero span The search is performed between the lines of the left and right limit see also Left Limit softkey If no value is set the upper limit corresponds to the stop frequency Remote command CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits RIGHT on page 104 Threshold Marker Peak List Opens an edit dialog box to define the threshold line The threshold line represents the lower level limit for a Peak search and the upper level limit for a Min search Remote command CALCulate lt n gt THReshold STATe on page 95 CALCulate lt n gt THReshold on page 95 ASCII File Export Marker Peak List Opens the ASCII File Export Name dialog box and saves the active peak list in ASCII format to the specified file and directory The file consists of the header containing important scaling parameters and a data section containing the marker data For details on an ASCII file see chapter 2 1 10 ASCII File Export Format on page 23 This format can be processed by spreadsheet calculation programs e g MS Excel It is necessary to define as a separator for the data import Different language versions of evaluation programs may require a different handling of the decimal point It is therefore possible to select between separators decimal point and comma using the Decim Sep softkey see Decim Sep on page 61 Remote command
274. olean gt This keyword refers to parameters which can adopt two states on and off The off state may either be indicated by the keyword OFF or by the numeric value 0 the on state is indicated by ON or any numeric value other than zero Parameter queries are always returned the numeric value 0 or 1 Se Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 82 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 1 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 lt numeric_value gt lt num gt These keywords mark parameters which may be entered as numeric values or be set using specific keywords character data The following keywords given below are per mitted e MAXimum This keyword sets the parameter to the largest possible value e MINimum This keyword sets the parameter to the smallest possible value e DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value e UP This keyword increments the parameter value e DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by add ing the corresponding keywords to the command They must be entered following the quotation mark Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer MAXimum Returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result lt arbitrary block program data gt This keyword is provid
275. on R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT FUNC PNO AUTO ON Activates an automatic peak search for the reference marker in a phase noise measurement CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt LINK lt State gt This command links delta marker 1 to marker 1 If you change the horizontal position of the marker so does the delta marker Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt 1 irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example CALC DELT LINK ON CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt MREF lt RefMarkerNo gt This command defines the reference marker for a delta marker other than marker 1 The reference may be another marker or the fixed reference Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt Selects the marker Parameters lt RefMarkerNo gt 1 16 Selects markers 1 to 16 as the reference FiXed Selects the fixed reference as the reference Example CALC DELT3 MREF 2 Specifies that the values of delta marker 3 are relative to marker 2 CALCulate lt n gt DELTamarker lt m gt STATe lt State gt This command turns delta markers on and off If the corresponding marker was a normal marker it is turned into a delta marker No suffix at DELTamarker turns on delta marker 1 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 167 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodu
276. on in time of the n dB marker to the right of the reference marker in seconds Example INIT CONT OFF Switches to single sweep mode CALC MARK FUNC NDBD ON Switches on the n dB down function INIT WAI Starts a sweep and waits for the end CALC MARK FUNC NDBD TIME Outputs the time values of the temporary markers Usage Query only CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion lt Excursion gt This command defines the peak excursion The peak excursion sets the requirements for a peak to be detected during a peak search The unit depends on the selected operating mode and measurement Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 101 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Mode Display mode Unit Spectrum dB ADEMOD RF display dB ADEMOD AM display PCT ADEMOD FM display kHz ADEMOD PM display RAD Suffix lt n gt lt m gt Parameters lt Excursion gt Example Selects the measurement window irrelevant The peak excursion is the distance to a trace maximum that must be attained before a new maximum is recognized or the distance to a trace minimum that must be attained before a new minimum is recognized RST 6dB in Spectrum mode and RF displays 5 PCT in AM displays 50 kHz in FM displays 0 5 RAD in PM displays CALC MARK PEXC 10dB Defines peak excursion 10 dB CALCulate lt
277. on page 29 Meas Time FM See Meas Time on page 29 AF Filter FM See AF Filter on page 29 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 35 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 AF Range FM See AF Range on page 32 Time Domain Zoom FM See Time Domain Zoom on page 34 Squelch FM See Squelch on page 35 Squelch Level FM See Squelch Level on page 35 PM Selects PM as the modulation type changes the signal display and opens a submenu to set the measurement configuration In single sweep mode the data is determined from the current UO data set i e a change to a different type does not trigger a new measurement This menu is also displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key after changing the modulation type Remote command CALC FEED XTIM PM see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Display Config PM See Display Config on page 27 Select Trace PM See Select Trace on page 28 Demod BW PM See Demod BW on page 29 Meas Time PM See Meas Time on page 29 AF Filter PM See AF Filter on page 29 AF Range PM See AF Range on page 32 Time Domain Zoom PM See Time Domain Zoom on page 34 Squelch PM See Squelch on page 35 Squelch Level PM See Squelch Level on page 35 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 36 R amp S FS
278. on the tab label If the level range or reference level is changed the R amp S FSV automatically adapts the measured data to the changed display range This allows an amplitude zoom to be made after the measurement in order to show details of the trace Remote command DISP TRAC MODE VIEW see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE on page 108 Blank Hides the selected trace Remote command DISP TRAC OFF see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 109 AF Trigger The analog demodulation option allows triggering to the demodulated signal The display is stable if a minimum of five modulation periods are within the recording time Triggering is always DC coupled Therefore triggering is possible directly to the point where a specific carrier level phase or frequency is exceeded or not attained Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 16 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 2 1 6 Stability of Measurement Results Despite amplitude and frequency modulation the display of carrier power and carrier frequency offset is stable This is achieved by a digital filter which sufficiently suppresses the modulation provided however that the measurement time is 2 3 x 1 modulation frequency i e that at least three periods of the AF signal are recorded The mean carrier power for calculating the AM is also c
279. ons that have only one measurement screen the suffix is irrelevant Query parameters lt ResultType gt TRACE1 TRACE2 TRACE3 TRACE4 TRACE5 TRACE6 Selects the type of result to be returned TRACE TRACE6 The query returns a list of results with one value for each sweep point in the currently set level unit For details see table 2 4 Example TRAC TRACEL Returns the trace data for Trace 1 Usage Query only Mode A ADEMOD BT NF PHN TDS Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 154 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Table 2 4 Results for lt TRACe gt ResultTypes The query returns a list of results with one value for each sweep point in the currently set level unit By default the list contains 691 values The currently used number of sweep points can be determined using SWE POIN see SENSe SWEep POINts on page 152 FORMat REAL 32 is used as format for binary transmission and FORMat ASCii for ASCII transmission With the auto peak detector only positive peak values can be read out In IQ Analyzer mode if the result display configuration Real Imag OI is selected this query returns the values of each trace point first then the Q values lt result gt ls Ja Qy Qa Qn 2 3 7 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format ASCII Format FORMat ASCII The command reads
280. or the phase devi ation R amp S FSV K7 only or frequency deviation on the y axis of the diagram By default this line is set to 0 The position is entered as a percentage of the diagram height with 100 corresponding to the upper diagram border The default setting is 50 diagram center for the display of the AM FM or PM signal and 100 upper diagram border for the AF spectrum display of the AM FM or PM signal Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition on page 111 Reference Value AF Range lt Left Determines the modulation depth or the phase deviation R amp S FSV K7 only or the fre quency deviation at the reference line of the y axis The reference value is set separately for each display of the AM FM and PM signal and the AF spectrum of the AM FM and PM signal e AM FM PM signal display The trace display takes individual frequency phase offsets into account in contrast the AF Coupling AC DC softkey permits automatic correction by the average fre quency phase offset of the signal and can therefore not be activated simultaneously Possible values 0 and 10000 AM 0 and 10 MHz FM 0 and 10000 rad PM e AF spectrum display of the AM FM PM signal In the default setting the reference value defines the modulation depth or the FM PM deviation at the upper diagram border Possible values 0 and 10000 AM 0 and 10 MHz FM 0 and 10000 rad PM Remote command
281. ording to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of Tr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPling on page 118 Deviation Lin Log AF Range AM Switches between logarithmic and linear display of the modulation depth or the phase deviation R amp S FSV K7 only or the frequency deviation Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 112 Unit AF Range AM Opens a submenu to define the modulation unit Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 33 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Phase Unit Rad Deg Unit AF Range AM Sets the phase unit to rad or deg for displaying PM signals Remote command UNIT THD on page 163 THD Unit DB Unit AF Range AM Sets the unit to percent or DB for THD measurements Remote command UNIT THD on page 163 Abs Dev Unit kHz dBm Unit AF Range AM Sets the unit for absolute deviation to kHz or dBm This softkey is only available with the FM Stereo option K7S Remote command UNIT ADEV on page 242 Rel Dev Unit dB Unit AF Range AM Sets the unit for relative deviation to dB or percent This softkey is only availab
282. ormation is delivered in the corresponding softkey description Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 207 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S THQ e er 208 L Froe Pato caesar eats E a 208 Le EE 208 L RF E 208 E a 209 PNM ashe iaincad at tatteauies E trae rman teen 209 EE 210 EE 210 Dee Ee 210 eege 210 Cp 210 Cisse E 210 e EE 210 CV E 210 Be e EE 210 Tagga POA TEE 211 Tigger EE 211 Rope tion INtEYal icini eaa aaa a aa a aaa ai iaa aiaia 212 Tagger KEE 212 Tagger Tele 212 Trigger Source Opens the Trg Source submenu to select the trigger source In FM Stereo mode the next measurement is triggered if the selected input signal exceeds the threshold specified using the Trigger Level on page 64 softkey A periodic signal modulated onto the carrier frequency can be displayed in this way It is recom mended that the measurement time covers at least five periods of the audio signal For triggering to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 Free Run Trigger Source The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 External Trigger Source Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GAT
283. p S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 see SENSe ADEMod SET on page 134 Sets demodulator ADEM FM AVER MAXH MINH see SENSe ADEMod FM TDOMain TYPE on page 125 Selects the FM results to be measured ADEM AM REL WRIT OFF OFF see SENSe ADEMod FM AFSPectrum TYPE on page 127 Selects the AM results to be measured ADEM FM AFSP WRIT OFF OFF see SENSe ADEMod FM AFSPectrum TYPE on page 127 Selects the AF spectrum results of the demodulated FM signal to be measured ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches the demodulator on INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for termination RM ASC see FORMat DATA on page 177 cts output format EM FM RES AVER see SENSe ADEMod FM DOMain RESult on page 126 eads FM average result data DEM FM RES MAXH see SENSe ADEMod FM DOMain RESult on page 126 eads FM maxhold result data DEM FM RES MINH see SENSe ADEMod FM DOMain RESult on page 126 eads FM minhold result data DEM AM RES WRIT see SENSe ADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain RESult on page 120 Reads current AM result data ADEM FM AFSP RES WRIT Reads current AF spectrum result data of demodulated FM signal Mode ADEMOD os D LI
284. page 115 Example DEM PM AVER MAXH MINH see SENSe ADEMod PM DOMain TYPE on page 129 etermines average maximum and minimum value simultane usly DEM PM WRIT OFF OFF etermines only current measurement results DEM PM OFF OFF OFF Switches the PM demodulator off Mode ADEMOD POoOPrOUH gt SENSe JADEMod PM TDOMain RESult lt Type gt This command reads the result data of the PM demodulation for the specified result type The data format of the output data is determined with the FORMat command Return values lt Type gt lt result type gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold for details see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 The specified result type must be one of those configured with the SENSe ADEMod PM TDOMain TYPE command Other wise a query error will be generated Return values ASCII Format FORMat ASCII or Binary Format FORMat REAL 32 for details see chapter 2 3 6 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 115 Default unit dB logarithmic display or RAD or DEG linear dis play Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 130 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 see SENSe ADEMod SET on page 134 Sets the demodulator parameters ADEM PM AVER
285. page 128 will return a correct result data to calculate the offset are taken from the last measured data set SENSe ADEMod FM OFFSet AVERage will cause a query error in this case Example ADEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 see SENSe ADEMod SET on page 134 Sets up demodulator parameters to execute 30 measurements ADEM FM AVER OFF OFF Selects FM results to perform averaging ADEM AM OFF OFF OFF Switches off AM demodulation ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on analog demodulator INIT WAI Starts measurement and waits for sync ADEM FM OFFS IMM Reads FM offset of last measurement of the sequence of 30 ADEM FM OFFS AVER Reads FM offset averaged over 30 measurements Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod MTIMe lt Time gt This command defines the measurement time for analog demodulation Parameters lt Time gt RST 62 5us Example ADEM MTIM 62 5us Sets the measurement time to 62 5 us Mode ADEMOD SENSe ADEMod PM TDOMain TYPE lt Type gt This command selects the result types of the PM demodulated signal to be created simultaneously Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 129 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt Type gt RST OFF OFF OFF lt result type 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW for details see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on
286. pling digitization already at the IF and digital down conversion to the baseband UO the demodulator achieves maximum accuracy and temperature stability There is no evidence of typical errors of an analog down conversion and demodulation like AM to FM conversion and vice versa deviation error frequency response or frequency drift at DC coupling To open the Analog Demodulation menu e If the Analog Demodulation mode is not the active measurement mode press the MODE key and select the Analog Demodulation softkey e Ifthe Analog Demodulation mode is already active press the HOME or MEAS key Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 10 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The Analog Demod menu is displayed see chapter 2 2 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 on page 24 Further information 2 1 1 Circuit Description Block Diagrams eee ceeeceeeeecee eee eeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeetenaaeeeeeeeeaaees 11 2 1 2 Demodulation Bandwidth ecserin ia ATA 13 2 13 Configuring gl 13 214 Trace ee Ee ET 15 LLS AP Ne e ET 16 2 1 6 Stability of Measurement Resuhts eee ceeeeee eee eeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeseceeaeeeeseneaeeeeeeeenaees 17 2 1 7 Detector Ove W TE 17 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset 18 2 1 9 Measurement Result Display 20 2 41 10 SCH Ee Export Formatsion iea ACEN EEEE E a 23 2 1 1 Circuit Description
287. ption R amp S FSV K7 a a a a ee Se Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 EM E 51 EE 51 EECH 52 o e E A EE E E EEE A 52 LGCIR Unwaged EE 52 L CCIR WUE EE 52 LA WMO EE 52 C Deemphasi EE 53 L AI AF Filter Op 53 DEON EEN 53 Res BW span gt 0 Opens an edit dialog box to enter a value for the resolution bandwidth The range is specified in the data sheet This softkey is only available for spectrum measurements see chapter 2 1 9 Measure ment Result Display on page 20 Remote command SENSe ADEMod SPECtrum BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution on page 135 Demod BW Opens an edit dialog box to enter the demodulation bandwidth of the analog demodula tion The demodulation bandwidth determines the sampling rate for recording the signal to be analyzed For details on the relation between demodulation bandwidth and sampling rate refer to chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Remote command SENSe BANDwidth BWIDth DEMod on page 143 Meas Time Opens an editor for entering the measurement time of the analog demodulation For details on the measurement time values refer to chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measure ment Time and Trigger Offset on page 18 Note For FM Stereo measurements option K7S the minimum measurement time is 2 ms Remote command SENSe ADEMod MTIMe on page 129 AF Filter The bandwidth of the demodulated sig
288. quire no reset after parameter changes the automatic reset can be switched off Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt trace Parameters lt State gt OFF ON OFF After certain parameter changes the traces are reset ON The automatic reset is switched off RST OFF Example DISP WIND TRAC3 MODE HCON ON Switches off the reset function Mode A DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel lt ReferenceLevel gt This command defines the reference level With the reference level offset 0 the value range of the reference level is modified by the offset Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 110 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt ReferenceLevel gt The unit is variable Range see datasheet RST 10dBm Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV 60dBm DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RLEVel OFFSet lt Value gt This command defines a reference level offset Suffix lt n gt irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt Range 200 to 200 RST 0 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y RLEV OFFS 10dB DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RPOSition lt Position gt This command defines the position of th
289. r Peak EE 217 EE 217 L Sort Mode Frm sss dcctscecsansndiouowshasaatsisnsinadsuataistatsed a 217 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 212 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S L Max Peak Counnt ccccccccccccseccsscccceccccsseceescseccaceetecescacsetessscaseeteceecaneenecaseas 218 EMR EE 218 d EE EE 218 C Right imit eea ea a ae aaae aa aae 218 T EEN 218 L ASCII File Export 218 EE 219 L Marker NUMBER ccccsscscosseecsccscvescesssonctssucsenvonevtesacarserevsoueteverssavccsesesannsiieens 219 Select Marker No Opens a submenu to select one of 16 markers and define whether the marker is a normal or a delta marker see Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 66 No indicates the number of the currently active marker See Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 66 Ref Fixed Opens a submenu to set all values of a reference point Instead of using the current values of the reference marker marker 1 as reference point for the delta markers level and frequency or time are set to fixed values and used as reference point Ref Fixed On Off Ref Fixed Switches the relative measurement to a fixed reference value on or off The level and frequency or time values of marker 1 immediately become the reference point but can be altered using the corresponding softkeys Ref Point Level on
290. r the left channel to peak hold The maximum value during 16 measurements is displayed in the result summary Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary REFerence AUTO ONCE This command determines the reference deviation from the current channel measure ment Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Example SFM LEFT RSUM REF ONCE Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt TDOmain RESult lt TraceMode gt This command reads the result data of the FM stereo signal in zero span in the specified trace mode The data format of the output data block is defined by the FORMat command see chapter 2 3 6 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 115 The output units are described in CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt PEXCursion on page 101 Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Query parameters lt TraceMode gt WRITe At least one screen must display a left channel that has the trace mode Write specified using SENSe ADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE on page 121 Otherwise a query error is generated Example SFM LEFT TDOM RES WRIT Returns the current trace results in the left channel Usage Query only Mode SFM Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 236
291. reads out binary data Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 each measurement value being formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Format The schematics of the result string will be as follows 41024 lt value1 gt lt value2 gt lt value n gt with Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 115 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 4 number of digits 4 in the example of the following number of data bytes 1024 number of following data bytes 1024 in the example lt value gt 4 byte floating point value 2 3 6 3 SENSe ADEMod Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The SENSe ADEMod Subsystem contains commands to set up the instrument for the measurement of analog demodulated signals and query the result at the end of the mea surement Further information e chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 e chapter 2 3 6 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 115 SENSe JADEMGG STATE wcccscsscctsscsssssssssivesssssssssvssssssivessecsesssinssavschsstssiesuennsssnesaesvsnns 117 SENSE JADEMOd N gt AF GENTET EE 117 ISENGeJADEMod nz AF CGOUbilmg 118 SENS ADEMod lt n AF SPAN ores ieia ea ENEE Edge Reg Ehe eie AE 118 SENSE TADEMed 0 gt EK DE EE 118 SENSe ADEMOG nFtAFIS TARG E 119 BSENS amp JADEMOd MAAF STOP EE 119 ISENGeJADE Mod AMIABGolutelt TDOMainl RE Gut 120 ISENSeIADEMod AMtABSolugeltTDOMainff TEE 1
292. relevant Parameters lt Interval gt 2 0 ms to 5000 RST 1 0 Example TRIG SOUR TIME Selects the time trigger input for triggering TRIG TIME RINT 50 The sweep starts every 50 s Mode All TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence LEVel VIDeo lt Value gt This command sets the level of the video trigger source Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Value gt 0 to 100 PCT RST 50 PCT Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 160 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example TRIG LEV VID 50PCT TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SLOPe lt Type gt This command selects the slope of the trigger signal The selected trigger slope applies to all trigger signal sources Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt Type gt POSitive NEGative RST POSitive Example TRIG SLOP NEG TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURCce lt Source gt This command selects the trigger source For triggering with AF AM AMRelative FM and PM trigger sources to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal For details on trigger modes refer to the Trigger Source softkey For details on trigger modes refer to the Trg Gate Source softkey in the base unit description Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 161 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 R
293. rmware R amp S FSV K7S It covers operation via menus and the remote con trol commands for FM stereo analog demodulation measurements e chapter 3 1 Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S on page 180 shows all softkeys available in the FM Stereo menu This chapter also presents the remote control commands associated with each softkey function e The following chapters describe the softkeys of the other keys for the FM Stereo option e chapter 3 2 Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S on page 219 describes all remote control commands defined for the FM Stereo option This part of the documentation includes only additional functions of the Application Firm ware R amp S FSV K7S For all other descriptions please refer to the description of the Analog Demodulation option K7 see chapter 2 2 1 Softkeys of the Analog Demodula tion Menu R amp S FSV K7 on page 25 3 1 Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S The firmware option R amp S FSV K7S together with the Analog Demodulation option K7 provides the necessary measurement functions to demodulate FM stereo signals It allows you to detect and analyze characteristic data in an FM stereo signal To open the FM Stereo menu e Ifthe FM Stereo mode is not the active measurement mode press the MODE key and select the FM Stereo softkey e fthe FM Stereo mode is already active press the HOME key or the MEAS key The FM Stereo menu i
294. s all softkeys available in the Analog Demod menu a EE AA E E E E E EE E 26 PR EE 27 L S ren EE 27 LOB EE 28 EE 28 N A 28 EE 28 Deg ebben erg 28 L Select Trace 28 L Demod EE 29 L Meas Time 29 A E e E ed 29 S EE 29 Eea EE 29 E e EE 30 D EE Ee 30 LAW ee e 30 L CCIR Unwelgbted 31 Sch weinbteg eet 31 L A I EE 31 DSTA RNS Dreier 31 G TT del dE 32 GE EE 32 L Dev per DMN EG 32 L Reference Posltton 32 L Reference VAlUC ccscccccescesceccecseseeceescesceseseeceeceseececieseesereeseetenseessees 33 L AF Coupling EE ee enee 33 L Deviation Lutgen hesena aa aaa a EE A 33 E TEE 33 L Phase Unit E isde ainai iiiar a 34 L THD Unit BY i vissecssissiviassicenasiaswecinnindeondasesiooveaaiee 34 L Abs Dev Umt kH ABM essai ssnsisassnessasadaaaascundonssarnadceanctasineiens 34 L Rel Dev Unit JB c cccccscccscscecccececssesesesesetesscecsecsseceneees 34 L Time Domain Zoom 34 L State On EE 34 EE 34 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 25 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Softkeys of the Analog Demodulation option K7 Liked Manual EE 34 a ET a a nse aise ees 35 E NE A 35 Squeleh EE 35 PIM DEE 35 EE 35 Wee Tea ise sade aber Sege 35 LDemod EE 35 L Meas TE 35 EE 35 EE 36 L Time Domain Zoom 36 DN ee 36 e TEE E ET 36 OU 36 Pe sinc eds trctd a ica vandals a Ea EEEN 36 L Select Trac EE 36 LEE 36 E ET EE 36 eer 36 Daer e as 36
295. s defined by the FORMat command see chapter 2 3 6 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 115 The output unit is dBm logarithmic display or V linear display Query parameters lt TraceMode gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW The specified trace mode must be one of those configured by SENSe ADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE on page 121 Otherwise a query error is generated For details on trace modes see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 120 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example DEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 A Sets up demodulator parameters ADEM AM AVER MAXH MINH Sets up AM results to be measured A S oO DEM ON witches on demodulator INIT WAI Starts measurement and waits for sync FORM ASC Selects output format ADEM AM RES AVER Reads AM average results ADEM AM RES MAXH Reads AM max hold results ADEM AM RES MINH Reads AM min hold results Usage Query only Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE lt TraceMode gt This command selects the trace modes of the RF signal to be measured simultaneously in zero span For each of the six available traces a mode can be defined Parameters lt TraceMode gt
296. s displayed Menu and softkey description The following softkey menus are specific to the FM Stereo option e chapter 3 1 2 Softkeys of the FM Stereo Menu MEAS key K7S on page 184 e chapter 3 1 3 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu AMPT Key R amp S FSV K7S on page 198 e chapter 3 1 6 Softkeys of the Marker Function Menu MKR FUNC Key R amp S FSV K7S on page 212 e chapter 3 1 5 Softkeys of the Trigger Menu TRIG Key R amp S FSV K7S on page 207 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 180 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S 3 1 1 3 1 2 3 1 3 3 1 4 3 1 5 3 1 6 Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Apart from the power measurement menu MEAS key that is not available in the FM Stereo mode all other menus not described here are provided as described for Analog Demodulation mode R amp S FSV K7 For details refer to the corresponding menu descrip tions e chapter 2 2 2 Softkeys of the Frequency Menu FREQ Key R amp S FSV K7 on page 38 e chapter 2 2 3 Softkeys of the Span Menu SPAN Key R amp S FSV K7 on page 40 e chapter 2 2 5 Softkeys of the Auto Set menu AUTO SET Key R amp S FSV K7 on page 47 e chapter 2 2 7 Softkeys of the Sweep Menu SWEEP Key R amp S FSV K7 on page 54 e chapter 2 2 8 Softkeys of the Trace Menu TRACE key R amp S FSV K7 on page 55 e chapter 2 2 10 Softkeys of the Marker Menu MKR key R amp S FS
297. s the marker information within the diagram area Aut Default The marker table is displayed automatically if more than 2 markers are active and removed if only 1 or 2 markers are active This helps keep the information in the display clear Remote command DISPlay MTAB1e on page 106 Marker Stepsize Opens a submenu to set the step size of all markers and delta markers Default value for the marker step size is Stepsize Sweep Points Stepsize Standard Marker Stepsize Moves the marker or delta marker from one measurement point to the next if the marker or delta marker value is changed via the rotary knob Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta softkeys see Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 66 If more measured values than measure ment points exist it is not possible to read out all measured values In this case use the Stepsize Sweep Points softkey Remote command CALC MARK X SSIZ STAN see CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SSIZe on page 105 Stepsize Sweep Points Marker Stepsize Moves the marker or delta marker from one measured value to the next if the marker or delta marker value is changed via the rotary knob Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta softkeys see Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 16 Marker Norm Delta on page 66 If more measured values than measurement points exist every sing
298. s the modulation depth or the FM PM deviation at the upper diagram border Possible values 0 and 10000 AM 0 and 10 MHz FM 0 and 10000 rad PM Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page 111 AF Coupling AC DC AF Range Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 199 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Note This function is not available with the AF spectrum display of the FM or PM signal e FM signal display If DC is selected the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line e PM signal display If DC is selected the phase runs according to the existing frequency offset In addi tion the DC signal contains a phase offset of Tr If AC is selected the frequency offset and phase offset are automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF COUPling on page 118 Deviation Lin Log AF Range Switches between logarithmic and linear display of the modulation depth or the phase de
299. s to be used for outputting measurement data to the file in ASCII format Different languages of eval uation programs e g MS Excel can thus be supported Parameters lt Separator gt POINt COMMA RST factory setting is POINt RST does not affect set ting Example FORM DEXP DSEP POIN Sets the decimal point as separator DIAGnostic lt n gt SERVice NSOurce lt State gt This command switches the 28 V supply of the noise source on the front panel on or off Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 177 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Suffix lt n gt irrelevant Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example DIAG SERV NSO ON INITiate lt n gt CONMeas This command restarts a measurement that has been stopped in single sweep mode The measurement is restarted at the first sweep point As opposed to INI Tiate lt n gt IMMediate this command does not reset traces in maxhold minhold or average mode Therefore it can be used to continue measurements using max hold or averaging functions In single sweep mode you can synchronize to the end of the measurement with OPC OPC or WAI In continuous sweep mode synchronization to the end of the measure ment is not possible Thus it is not recommended that you use continuous sweep mode in remote control as results like trace data or markers are only valid
300. sesesessesesesesseseseseseneeneeees 10 CISPR Average 59 AF trigger K7 KES sdecsecsesccncctas 189 bandwidth K7 Si Negative Peak D Circuit description K7 c ccceccceceeseceeeseeeeteeseteesetees 11 Positive Peak 58 measurement results analog demodulation 17 Quasi Peak w BO measurement time analog demodulation RMS seen m 58 sample rate analog demodulation c00e08 RMS Average H nenn D I trigger offset analog demodulation 2 120151201210 18 Sample wi krkan Eei 58 Analog Demodulation menu K7 ee Diff Freq Distortion ASCII Trace export cccccccccccccsccsecesecsecsececsescsteseseesees FEMOS CONO EE 223 attenuation softkey Option B25 c cecccccsesesesesesescesesesesessssstereneseass Diff Freq Distortion On Off Attenuation LL EE 215 option B25 DiglConf Automatic 45 202 DEN ee Zeg 78 Manual 10 0 0 ceceeceeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeenteseeeeees 45 170 201 Digital IQ data Option B25 ccccccccccsceecseseeseeseecssensessesseesnee 45 201 EE 76 Auto level Digital IQ Info Hysteresis oo ccccccsccscesesscseceseesecsecsecsecsecseeseesteaees 49 Remote Control cis siciccctssctatssiensstedsedessadestiavaaraeccerncs 171 Auto Peak detector cccccscssscecscsessesesesesesssesesessseseseees 17 Softkey Auto Set menu display configuration Average detector c ceccccscscssesssesescsesseseseeneseseseseseeeeneneneees 17 analog demodulation EEN 20 Avera
301. simultane ously ADEM AM REL WRIT OFF OFF Determines only the current measurement values ADEM AM REL OFF OFF OFF Switches AM demodulation off Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod AM RELative TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt This command reads the result data obtained by AM demodulation for the specified result type The data format of the output data block is defined by the FORMat command see chapter 2 3 6 2 Formats for Returned Values ASCII Format and Binary Format on page 115 The output unit is Query parameters lt TraceMode gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW The specified trace mode must be one of those configured by SENSe ADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain TYPE on page 121 Otherwise a query error is generated For details on trace modes see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 122 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 DEM SET 8MHz 32000 EXT POS 500 30 ets up demodulator parameters DEM FM AVER MAXH MINH Example A S A Selects FM results to be measured A S A S DEM AM REL WRIT OFF OFF elects AM results to be measured DEM ON witches on demodulator INIT WAI Starts measurement and waits for sync FORM ASC Selects output format ADEM FM RES AVER Reads FM average results
302. smallest possible value e DEFault This keyword is used to reset the parameter to its default value e uP This keyword increments the parameter value e DOWN This keyword decrements the parameter value The numeric values associated to MAXimum MINimum DEFault can be queried by add ing the corresponding keywords to the command They must be entered following the quotation mark Example SENSe FREQuency CENTer MAXimum Returns the maximum possible numeric value of the center frequency as result lt arbitrary block program data gt This keyword is provided for commands the parameters of which consist of a binary data block CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion Subsystem FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S The CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion subsystem contains the marker functions for the option FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S CAL Culate nzM AbkertUlNCHon DEDISTATel rnn neososrsnrenerersrennnene 223 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion DFD UNIT ccccsceeseseseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeecesesenaaeaeaaaeenenens 223 CAL Culate nzMAbkertUNGCHon DEDIRE Gultemzl nenn eoeososere nen enoressrerenene 223 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion DFD SEARchsignal ONCE ceceeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeeeees 224 CAL Culate nzM AbkertUlNCHonIMDTSTATel ns 224 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion IMD UNIT 2 cceeeeeeceeecaeeneeneeeseneaaneeneeeeneseneaaaeene 224 CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion IMD RESUIt lt Mm gt 00 0 eee eeece
303. spectrum result display The maximum span corresponds to half the measurement bandwidth of analog demod ulation SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation on page 125 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 118 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Suffix lt n gt Example Mode Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 1 4 irrelevant ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on the analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM AFSP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on AF spectrum result display of FM ADEM BAND 5 MHz see SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation on page 125 Sets the measurement bandwidth to 5 MHz ADEM AF SPAN FULL Sets the AF span to 2 5 MHz ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AF STARt lt Frequency gt This command sets the start frequency for AF spectrum result display Suffix lt n gt Parameters lt Frequency gt Example Mode 1 4 irrelevant RST 0 MHz ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on the analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM AFSP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on AF spectrum result display of FM ADEM BAND 5 MHz see SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation on page 125 Sets the measurement bandwidth to 5 MHz ADEM AF STAR 0 kHz Sets the AF s
304. ss filter as 25 of the demodulation bandwidth Mode ADEMOD SENSe FREQuency Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 The SENSe FREQuency subsystem defines the frequency axis of the active display The frequency axis can either be defined via the start stop frequency or via the center fre quency and span SENSe PFREQUENGYICENTER E 148 SENSeFREGusncy CENT Gn STEP gie Ehe EENS GENEE 149 SENSe FREQuency CENTerSTEPILINK i iiccc ci ieeccemeteiaeieieeet chiascdeee i EEN ER 149 SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK FAGTOM 2 0 22 cccetsccecctedasenaadecevecennaraccanaeeenaee 149 SENSe FREQuency CENTer lt Frequency gt This command defines the center frequency frequency domain or measuring frequency time domain Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 148 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Eh Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt Frequency gt Range 0 to fmax RST fmax 2 Default unit Hz fmax IS Specified in the data sheet min span is 10 Hz Example FREQ CENT 100 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP lt StepSize gt This command defines the center frequency step size Parameters lt StepSize gt Range 1 to fmax RST 0 1 x lt span value gt Default unit Hz Example FREQ CENT STEP 120 MHz SENSe FREQuency CENTer STEP LINK lt CouplingType gt This command couples and decouples the center frequen
305. t Spectrum Sa aaa A MPX Time Domain B MPX Spectrum Minana Add Predefined Display Config Left Opens an edit dialog box to enter a name for the current screen configuration The con figuration is then stored and added to the list Apply Predefined Display Config Left Applies the currently selected configuration from the list to the current display Remove lt Predefined Display Config Left Removes the currently selected configuration from the list Restore Predefined Display Config Left Restores the default display configuration Existing configurations with the default names are replaced Close Predefined Display Config Left Closes the displays settings dialog box Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 187 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Result Summary Setup lt Left General Settings Reference Deviation 75 0 kHz Channel Settings Detector Mode Coupled Left BR Meas To Ref nx u mmm A 2 Pilot Peak 2 Clear Write The result summary table displays the results of all channel mesaurements in a table It is configured in the Result Summary Setup dialog box This function is only available for screens for which an FM stereo measurement is selected in the Display Settings see Display Config on page 185 B Result Summar
306. t gt lt dm2 gt lt dm3 gt The modulation factors of 2nd and 3rd order Example CALC MARK FUNC IMD RES Usage Query only Mode SFM CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion IMD SEARchsignal ONCE This command starts the search of the signals required for the intermodulation distortion measurement in the specified window Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Example CALC MARK FUNC IMD SEAR ONCE Usage Event Mode SFM CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion SFM RESult lt m gt lt ResultType gt This command queries the results of the stereo measurement Suffix lt n gt 1 4 window Query parameters lt ResultType gt SUMMary FCARrier XTALk SUMMary Returns all results of the measurement FCARrier Returns only the carrier frequency XTALk Returns crosstalk between left and right channels in dB 20 log Left kHz Right kHz dB Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 225 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Return values lt SUMMary gt lt Absolute deviation gt lt Relative deviation gt lt SINAD gt lt THD gt lt Modulation frequency gt The results consist of the described 5 values for each channel separated by commas Note if one of the result values is not available 9 91E 37 is inserted for the missing value To obtain the results for an individual channel or only individual results use the specific co
307. t n gt is irrelevant trace WRITe VIEW AVERage MAXHold MINHold BLANk RST WRITe for TRACe1 STATe OFF for TRACe2 3 4 5 6 For details on trace modes refer to chapter 2 1 4 Trace Mode Overview on page 15 INIT CONT OFF Switching to single sweep mode SWE COUN 16 Sets the number of measurements to 16 DISP TRAC3 MODE MAXH Switches on the calculation of the maximum peak for trace 3 INIT WAI Starts the measurement and waits for the end of the 16 sweeps 108 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 REENERT Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe lt State gt This command switches on or off the display of the corresponding trace The other meas urements are not aborted but continue running in the background Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt trace Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON for TRACe1 OFF for TRACe2 to 6 Example DISP TRAC3 ON DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe lt Range gt This command defines the display range of the y axis with logarithmic scaling The command works only for a logarithmic scaling You can select the scaling with DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 112 Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not ha
308. t the measurement time covers at least five periods of the audio signal For triggering with AM FM PM or RF trigger sources to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal Remote command TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 Free Run Trigger Source The start of a sweep is not triggered Once a measurement is completed another is started immediately Remote command TRIG SOUR IMM see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 External Trigger Source Defines triggering via a TTL signal at the EXT TRIG GATE IN input connector on the rear panel Remote command TRIG SOUR EXT see TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce on page 161 RF Power Trigger Source Defines triggering of the measurement via signals which are outside the measurement channel This trigger mode is available with detector board 1307 9554 02 Rev 05 00 or higher It is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 If RF Power trigger mode is selected and digital baseband input is activated the trigger mode is automatically switched to Free Run In RF Power trigger mode the instrument uses a level detector at the first intermediate frequency The detector threshold can be selected in a range between 50 dBm and 10 dBm at the input mixer The resulting trigger level at the RF input lies within the following range 24dBm RF Att lt Trig
309. tart frequency to 0 kHz SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF STOP on page 119 Sets the AF stop frequency to 500 kHz ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod lt n gt AF STOP lt Frequency gt This command sets the stop frequency for AF spectrum result display The stop frequency is limited to half the measurement bandwidth of analog demodulation d Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 ENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation on page 125 119 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Deg Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt Frequency gt RST 2 5 MHz Example ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on the analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM FM AFSP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on AF spectrum result display of FM ADEM BAND 5 MHz see SENSe ADEMod BANDwidth BWIDth DEModulation on page 125 Sets the measurement bandwidth to 5 MHz SENSe ADEMod lt n gt AF STARt on page 119 Sets the AF start frequency to 0 kHz ADEM AF STOP 500 kHz Sets the AF stop frequency to 500 kHz Mode ADEMOD SENSe JADEMod AM ABSolute TDOMain RESult lt TraceMode gt This command reads the result data of the RF signal in zero span in the specified trace mode The data format of the output data block i
310. terororernsnrnrenene 235 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary REFerence AUTO ONE 236 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt TDOmain RE Gul 236 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt TDOmain Tt 237 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt AFSPectrum TYPE lt TraceMode gt This command selects the trace modes of the FM stereo AF spectrum to be measured simultaneously For each trace a mode can be defined however only if the specified channel is currently displayed in one of the four screens If a trace mode is set for a channel that is not displayed a query error is generated Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 228 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Suffix lt ChannelType gt LEFT RIGHt MPX MONO STEReo RDS PILot Channel type for which the command is performed Parameters lt TraceMode gt lt TraceMode1 gt lt TraceMode2 gt lt TraceMode3 gt lt Trace Mode4 gt lt TraceMode5 gt lt TraceMode6 gt WRITe AVERage MAXHold MINHold VIEW OFF For details on trace modes see chapter 2 3 6 1 Trace Mode Result Types on page 115 RST OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Example SFM LEFT AFSP TYPE WRIT Ob AVER Mode SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt AFSPectrum RESult lt TraceMode gt This command reads the AF spectrum result data of the FM stereo signal in the specified trace mode The data format of the output data block
311. the EXIQ menu regardless of which key was pressed For details on the R amp S DiglConf application see the R amp S EX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp S Dig Conf Software Operating Manual Note If you close the R amp S DiglConf window using the Close icon the window is mini mized not closed If you select the File gt Exit menu item in the R amp S DiglConf window the application is closed Note that in this case the settings are lost and the EX IQ BOX functionality is no longer available until you restart the application using the DiglConf softkey in the R amp S FSV once again Remote command Remote commands for the R amp S DiglConf software always begin with SOURce EBOX Such commands are passed on from the R amp S FSV to the R amp S DiglConf automatically which then configures the R amp S EX IQ BOX via the USB connection All remote commands available for configuration via the R amp S DiglConf software are described in the R amp S EX IQ BOX Digital Interface Module R amp S DiglConf Software Operating Manual Example 1 SOURce EBOX RST SOURce EBOX IDN Result Rohde amp Schwarz DigIConf 02 05 436 Build 47 Example 2 SOURce EBOX USER CLOCk REFerence FREQuency 5MHZ Defines the frequency value of the reference clock Digital IQ Info Displays a dialog box with information on the digital UO input and output connection via the optional R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S
312. the 20 Hz highpass and 23 kHz low pass filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 1 6 MHz For FM stereo K7S the filter is active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR UNWeighted STATe on page 145 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCIR UNWeighted STATe on page 230 CCIR Weighted Weighting AF Filter AN Switches on the CCIR weighted filter The weighting filter is active in the following demod ulation bandwidth range 100 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 0 MHz For FM stereo K7S the filter is active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIR WEIGhted STATe on page 145 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCIR WEIGhted STATe on page 230 A Weighted Weighting AF Filter AM Switches on the A weighted filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodu lation bandwidth range 100 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 800 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt AWEighted STATe on page 144 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer AWEighted STATe on page 229 Deemphasis AF Filter AM Opens the Deemphasis selection list to switch on a deemphasis with the given time constant The deemphasis is active in t
313. the level when the pilot stereo channel is used as trigger source Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant Parameters lt Level gt Range 10 to 10 RST 0 Hz Default unit MHz Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 239 Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Example TRIG LEV SFM PIL 2Hz Sets the trigger threshold of the pilot stereo signal to 2 Hz Mode SFM TRIGger lt n gt SEQuence SOURce lt Source gt This command selects the trigger source for the start of a sweep Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Parameters lt Source gt Example Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 Remote Commands of the FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S IMMediate EXTern FPower AF FM AM AMRelative PM TIME SLEFt SRIGht SMPX SMONo SSTereo SRDS SPILot For details on trigger sources refer to the Trigger Source on page 208 softkey For triggering with AF AM AMRelative FM and PM trigger sour ces to be successful the measurement time must cover at least 5 periods of the audio signal IMMediate Free Run no trigger EXTern External trigger IFPower Triggering via signals which are outside the measurement channel AF Audio frequency trigger FM Triggering via FM frequency level AM Triggering via RF power signal AMRelative Triggering via AM signal PM Triggering via PM frequency level TIME Triggeri
314. the zoom area to the number of sweep points see Sweep Points on page 55 Remote command SENSe ADEMod lt n gt ZOOM LENGth MODE on page 140 Squelch AM Activates the squelch function i e if the signal falls below a defined threshold the demodulated data is automatically set to 0 This is useful for example to avoid demod ulation noise during transmission breaks Remote command SENSe ADEMod SQUelch STATe on page 138 Squelch Level AM Defines the level threshold below which the demodulated data is set to 0 if squelching is enabled The squelch level is an absolute value Remote command SENSe ADEMod SQUelch LEVel on page 138 FM Selects FM as the modulation type changes the signal display and opens a submenu to set the measurement configuration The average value of the demodulated signal is mapped depending on the AF Coupling softkey setting see AF Coupling AC DC on page 33 In single sweep mode the data is determined from the current UO data set i e a change to a different type does not trigger a new measurement This menu is also displayed when you press the MEAS CONFIG key after changing the modulation type Remote command CALC FEED XTIM FM see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Display Config FM See Display Config on page 27 Select Trace FM See Select Trace on page 28 Demod BW FM See Demod BW
315. tion Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active The attenuation can be varied in 1 dB steps from 0 to 25 dB Other entries are rounded to the next lower integer value If the defined reference level cannot be set for the given RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly and the warning Limit reached is output Parameters lt Attenuation gt 0 25 RST 0 dB OFF Example INP1 EATT 10 dB Mode all INPut EATT AUTO lt State gt This command switches the automatic behaviour of the electronic attenuator on or off If activated electronic attenuation is used to reduce the operation of the mechanical attenu ation whenever possible This command is only available with option R amp S FSV B25 but not if R amp S FSV B17 is active Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST ON Example INP1 EATT AUTO OFF Mode all INPut GAIN STATe lt State gt This command turns the 20 dB preamplifier on and off With option R amp S FSV B22 the preamplifier only has an effect below 7 GHz With option R amp S FSV B24 the amplifier applies to the entire frequency range This command is not available when using R amp S Digital UO Interface R amp S FSV B17 Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Example INP GAIN STAT ON Turns the preamplifier on INPut IMPedance
316. tly being displayed on a screen are deactivated to improve performance The traces can only be activated again when the samples are reduced Measurement Result Display In Analog Demodulation mode the measurement results can be displayed in up to 4 different screens windows plus an additional marker table if applicable Each screen shows either the measurement results as a diagram or the results of evaluation functions in a table Result Summary All displays are determined by the UO data set recorded for the measurement You can define the display configuration for up to 4 different screens at once using the Display Config on page 27 softkey Screen configuration For each screen you can define e Off Whether it is displayed or not e Summary Whether a result summary for all screens is displayed instead of a dia gram SSS eee ee Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 20 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 i a Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 e AM FM PM RF Diagrams Which type of diagram is displayed Diagram types The following diagram types can be selected for display e AM FM PM Time Domain Selects the AF display in zero span calculated from the AM FM or PM signal SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM FM see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Displays the demodulated FM signal from trace 1 in screen A e AM FM PM Spectrum Sel
317. ts of the AM modulation measurement Suffix lt n gt 1 4 irrelevant lt t gt 1 6 trace 1 2 3 4 50r6 Parameters lt Result gt The result of the selected measurement type is returned Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 84 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Query parameters lt MeasType gt Example Usage Mode Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 PPEak MPEak MIDDle RMS PPEak Measurement with detector Pluspeak PK MPEak Measurement with detector MinusPeak PK MIDDle Averaging PK 2 RMS RMS measurement ADEM ON see SENSe ADEMod STATe on page 117 Switches on the analog demodulator CALC FEED XTIM AM TDOM see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Switches on the AM result display DISP TRAC ON see DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt STATe on page 109 Switches on the trace CALC MARK FUNC ADEM AM PPE Queries the peak value Query only ADEMOD CALCulate lt n gt MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod CARRier RESult lt t gt This command queries the carrier power With RF Power result display the carrier power is determined from trace 1 to 6 indicated in the suffix With all other result displays the carrier power is determined from the current trace data CLR WRITE trace Suffix lt n gt lt t gt Example Usage Mode Operating Manual 1173 0666 02
318. u see Left on page 185 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 RDS Displays the RDS signal of the FM stereo input and the RDS submenu which is identical to the Left submenu see Left on page 185 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Pilot Displays the pilot signal of the FM stereo input and the Pilot submenu which is identical to the Left submenu see Left on page 185 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 197 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S RF Power Selects RF power as the modulation type changes the signal display and opens a sub menu to set the measurement configuration For details see the Analog Demodulation option K7 RF Power on page 37 Remote command CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 Display Config See Display Config on page 185 Softkeys of the Amplitude Menu AMPT Key R amp S FSV K7S The following table shows all softkeys available in the Amplitude menu in FM stereo mode AMPT key Frye LEVE E 198 A le 199 L Dev pef EE 199 L LEE 199 L Reference Value 199 L AF Coupling ACIDO eiiiai a aa a 199 L Deviation EE 200 Gelee 200 L Phase Unit PBadfieg 200 L THD Unit EE 200 L Abs Dev Unit kzid m 200 L Rel Dev Unit dB P96 E 200 UA eaat a aE deed a a aa a
319. uation range to the trace Note The function is only available if the search limit for marker and delta marker is switched on CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt irrelevant Parameters lt Limit gt The value range depends on the span or sweep time The unit is Hz for frequency domain measurements and s for time domain measurements Range 0 to MAX RST left diagram border Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches the search limit function on CALC MARK X SLIM RIGH 20MHz Sets the right limit of the search range to 20 MHz CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SLIMits STATe lt State gt This command turns marker search limits on and off If the power measurementin Zero span is active this command limits the evaluation range on the trace Suffix lt n gt Selects the measurement window lt m gt marker Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 104 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Deeg Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Example CALC MARK X SLIM ON Switches on search limitation CALCulate lt n gt MARKer lt m gt X SSlZe lt StepSize gt This command defines the step size of the rotary knob for marker or delta marker value changes It only takes effect in manual operation The marker step size is unavailable for statistical
320. uency ABSolute on page 147 ENSe FILTer lt n gt LPASs FREQuency RELative on page 148 ENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs STATe on page 232 ENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer LPASs FREQuency on page 233 Weighting AF Filter Opens the Weighting selection list to select the weighting AF filter Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 205 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S None Weighting AF Filter Deactivates the weighting filter This is the default setting Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt HPASs STATe on page 146 CCITT Weighting AF Filter Switches on a CCITT P 53 weighting filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 20 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 3 MHz For FM stereo K7S the filter is active at all times as the demodulation range is always 400 kHz Remote command SENSe FILTer lt n gt CCIT on page 145 SFM SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt FILTer CCITt STATe on page 230 CCIR Unweighted Weighting AF Filter Switches on the CCIR unweighted filter which is the combination of the 20 Hz highpass and 23 kHz low pass filter The weighting filter is active in the following demodulation bandwidth range 50 kHz lt demodulation bandwidth lt 1 6 MHz For FM stereo K7S the filter is active at all times as
321. ument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Screen configuration For each screen you can define e Off Whether it is displayed or not e Summary Whether a result summary for all screens is displayed instead of a dia gram e RF Diagrams Whether an RF diagram is displayed these displays correspond to those for Analog Demodulation mode R amp S FSV K7 see chapter 2 1 9 Measure ment Result Display on page 20 e FM Stereo Diagrams For which channel a time domain or spectrum diagram is displayed Diagram types The following diagram types can be selected for display e RF Time Domain Selects the display of the RF power in zero span In contrast to normal analyzer operation the level values are the magnitude of the UO data set SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM RFP see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 e RF Spectrum Selects the display of the RF signal in span gt 0 In contrast to normal spectrum ana lyzer operation the measured values are determined using FFT from the recorded U Q data set SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM SPECTRUM see CALCulate lt n gt FEED on page 89 e lt FM Stereo Channel Type gt Time Domain Selects the display of the channel power in zero span In contrast to normal analyzer operation the level values are the magnitude of the I Q data set SCPI command CALC FEED XTIM SFM lt ChannelType gt g CALC
322. ve more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Parameters lt Range gt Range 10 to 200 RST 100 Default unit dB Example DISP TRAC Y 110dB DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe MODE lt Mode gt This command selects the type of scaling of the y axis When SySTem DISPlay UPDate is turned off this command has no immediate effect on the screen Suffix lt n gt window For applications that do not have more than 1 measure ment window the suffix lt n gt is irrelevant lt t gt irrelevant Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 109 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Parameters lt Mode gt ABSolute absolute scaling of the y axis RELative relative scaling of the y axis RST ABS Example DISP TRAC Y MODE REL DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt MODE HCONtinuous lt State gt This command defines whether traces in Min Hold Max Hold and Average mode are reset in the window specified by the suffix lt n gt after parameter change or not Normally the measurement is started anew after parameter changes before the mea surement results are evaluated e g using a marker In all cases that require a new measurement after parameter changes the trace is reset automatically to avoid false results e g with span changes For applications that re
323. viation R amp S FSV K7 only or the frequency deviation Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SPACing on page 112 Unit AF Range Opens a submenu to define the modulation unit Phase Unit Rad Deg Unit AF Range Sets the phase unit to rad or deg for displaying PM signals Remote command UNIT THD on page 163 THD Unit DB Unit AF Range Sets the unit to percent or DB for THD measurements Remote command UNIT THD on page 163 Abs Dev Unit kHz dBm Unit AF Range Sets the unit for absolute deviation to kHz or dBm This softkey is only available with the FM Stereo option K7S Remote command UNIT ADEV on page 242 Rel Dev Unit dB Unit AF Range Sets the unit for relative deviation to dB or percent This softkey is only available with the FM Stereo option K7S Remote command UNIT RDEV on page 243 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 200 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S Unit Opens a submenu to define the modulation unit Phase Unit Rad Deg Unit Sets the phase unit to rad or deg for displaying PM signals Remote command UNIT THD on page 163 THD Unit DB Unit Sets the unit to percent or DB for THD measurements Remote command UNIT THD on page 163 Abs Dev Unit kHz dBm Unit Sets the unit for absolute deviation to kHz or dBm This softke
324. when using an RMS detector Normally if the RMS detector is used the sweep time should be increased to get more stable trace curves 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset Depending on the sample rate the maximum demodulation bandwidths listed in the table can be obtained during the measurement The permissible value range of the measure ment time and trigger offset depends on the selected demodulation bandwidth and demodulation filter If the AF filter or the AF trigger are not active the measurement time increases by 20 Option K7S The K7S option always uses the demodulation bandwidth 400 kHz Table 2 2 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger Offset using a flat demodulation filter Demod band Sample rate Measurement time Trigger offset width Min Max Min Max 160 MHz 200 MHz 5 ns 8 ms 8 ms 1 0486 s 80 MHz 128 MHz 7 8125 ns 12 5 ms 12 5 ms 1 6384 s 40 MHz 64 MHz 15 625 ns 25 ms 25 ms 3 2768 s 28 MHz 64 MHz 15 625 ns 25 ms 25 ms 3 2768 s 18 MHz 32 MHz 31 25 ns 50 ms 50 ms 6 5536 s 10 MHz 32 MHz 31 25 ns 50 ms 50 ms 6 5536 s 8 MHz 16 MHz 62 5 ns 100 ms 100 ms 13 1072 s Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 18 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 Instrument Functions Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Demod band Sample rat
325. xis The reference value is set separately for each display of the AM FM and PM signal and the AF spectrum of the AM FM and PM signal e AM FM PM signal display The trace display takes individual frequency phase offsets into account in contrast the AF Coupling AC DC softkey permits automatic correction by the average fre quency phase offset of the signal and can therefore not be activated simultaneously Possible values 0 and 10000 AM 0 and 10 MHz FM 0 and 10000 rad PM e AF spectrum display of the AM FM PM signal In the default setting the reference value defines the modulation depth or the FM PM deviation at the upper diagram border Possible values 0 and 10000 AM 0 and 10 MHz FM 0 and 10000 rad PM Remote command DISPlay WINDow lt n gt TRACe lt t gt Y SCALe RVALue on page 111 AF Coupling AC DC AF Range AM Controls the automatic correction of the frequency offset and phase offset of the input signal Note This function is not available with the AF spectrum display of the FM or PM signal e FM signal display If DC is selected the absolute frequency is displayed i e an input signal with an offset relative to the center frequency is not displayed symmetrically with respect to the zero line If AC is selected the frequency offset is automatically corrected i e the trace is always symmetric with respect to the zero line e PM signal display If DC is selected the phase runs acc
326. y Carrier Power 200 97 dBm Carrier Freq 15 0 GHz Mod Depth 0 0 Fig 3 1 Result summary for an FM stereo measurement In the General Settings area you define the Reference Deviation for all summaries manually Alternatively you can determine the reference deviation from one of the chan nel measurements by selecting Meas To Ref see Meas To Ref on page 190 For each FM stereo channel you can define individual channel settings e Detector on page 189 e Mode on page 189 e Coupled on page 189 Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 188 R amp S FSV K7 K7S FM Stereo Option R amp S FSV K7S El Instrument Functions FM Stereo R amp S FSV K7S e Meas To Ref on page 190 Remote command SENSe SFM REFerence on page 228 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary DETector FUNCtion on page 234 SENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary MODE on page 235 S S ENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary COUPling on page 234 ENSe SFM lt ChannelType gt RSUMmary REFerence AUTO ONCE on page 236 Detector Result Summary Setup Left Defines the detector used for the deviation measurement RMS RMS SQRT2 Pos Peak Neg Peak Peak 2 QP CCIR QP SQRT2 Note To ensure correct measurements with QP detectors it is recommended that you set the measurement time to its maximum value see Meas Time on page 29 and chapter 2 1 8 Sample Rate Measurement Time and Trigger O
327. y is only available with the FM Stereo option K7S Remote command UNIT ADEV on page 242 Rel Dev Unit dB Unit Sets the unit for relative deviation to dB or percent This softkey is only available with the FM Stereo option K7S Remote command UNIT RDEV on page 243 Preamp On Off Switches the preamplifier on and off If option R amp S FSV B22 is installed the preamplifier is only active below 7 GHz If option R amp S FSV B24 is installed the preamplifier is active for all frequencies This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 Remote command INPut GAIN STATe on page 174 RF Atten Manual Mech Att Manual Opens an edit dialog box to enter the attenuation irrespective of the reference level If electronic attenuation is activated option R amp S FSV B25 only El Atten Mode Auto soft key this setting defines the mechanical attenuation The mechanical attenuation can be set in 10 dB steps The RF attenuation can be set in 5 dB steps with option R amp S FSV B25 1 dB steps The range is specified in the data sheet If the current reference level cannot be set for the set RF attenuation the reference level is adjusted accordingly This function is not available for input from the R amp S Digital UO Interface option R amp S FSV B17 The RF attenuation defines the level at the input mixer according to the formula Operating Manual 1173 066
328. zer or basic settings commands refer to the correspond ing subsystem in the base unit description In particular the following subsystems are identical to the base unit refer to the base unit description e CALCulate DELTamarker e CALCulate MARKer except for the K7 specific commands described in chap ter 2 3 2 CALCulate Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 on page 83 e INITiate subsystem e INPut subsystem e OUTput subsystem Operating Manual 1173 0666 02 06 79 R amp S FSV K7 K7S Analog Demodulation Option R amp S FSV K7 2 3 1 2 3 2 2 3 2 1 2 3 2 2 2 3 2 3 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 6 2 3 6 1 2 3 6 2 2 3 6 3 2 3 6 4 2 3 6 5 2 3 6 6 2 3 6 7 2 3 6 8 2 3 6 9 2 3 7 2 3 7 1 2 3 7 2 2 3 8 2 3 9 2 3 10 2 3 10 1 2 3 10 2 2 3 10 3 2 3 10 4 2 3 10 5 Remote Commands of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Subsystems of the Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV K7 Notai OMe TEE 81 CALCulate Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S EGMKI 83 CALCulate MARKer FUNCtion ADEMod Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S FSV KL DEE 83 Other CALCulate commande 89 Other Referenced CALCulate Commande 96 DISPlay Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S ESM KIO ne 106 INSTrument Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S EG ARTI 113 PROBE SUDSYStOM 0000 eeeeeeteeeeeeeeee eter tena eee eeteeeeaaeeeeeeeeaaeeeeeseeaaaeeeeseeeaaeeeeseeesneeeeeneaas 113 SENSe Subsystem Analog Demodulation R amp S EG

R&S FSV-K7/K7S Firmware Options Analog

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S FSV-K7/K7S Firmware Options Analog

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S FSV-K7/K7S Firmware Options Analog